IP PBX Manual Table of Contents

From IPitomy Wiki
(Difference between revisions)
Jump to: navigation, search
(Created page with "'''IPitomy IP PBX Administrator Guide''' '''Version v4.2.1''' All materials in this documentation are proprietary and considered confidential to IPitomy Communications, LLC...")
 
 
(40 intermediate revisions by 5 users not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
 +
__NOTITLE__ {{IP_PBX_Manual|sortkey=Table of Contents}}
 +
<center>
 
'''IPitomy IP PBX Administrator Guide'''
 
'''IPitomy IP PBX Administrator Guide'''
 
+
</center><center>All materials in this documentation are proprietary and considered confidential to IPitomy Communications, LLC and may not be disclosed without the express written permission of IPitomy Communications, LLC. © 2012 IPitomy Communications, LLC All rights reserved.</center><center>'''IPitomy Communications, LLC'''</center><center>Phone: 941.306.2200</center><center>Email: [mailto:info@ipitomy.com info@ipitomy.com]</center><center>[http://www.ipitomy.com/ www.ipitomy.com]</center><center>Corporate Offices:</center><center>1940 Northgate Blvd.</center><center>Suite B-1</center><center>
'''Version v4.2.1'''
+
 
+
 
+
All materials in this documentation are proprietary and considered confidential to IPitomy Communications, LLC and may not be disclosed without the express written permission of Ipitomy Communications, LLC. © 2010 Ipitomy Communications, LLC – All rights reserved.
+
 
+
 
+
'''Ipitomy Communications, LLC'''
+
 
+
Phone: 941.306.2200
+
 
+
Email: [mailto:info@ipitomy.com info@ipitomy.com]
+
 
+
[http://www.ipitomy.com/ www.ipitomy.com]
+
 
+
 
+
Corporate Offices:
+
 
+
1940 Northgate Blvd.
+
 
+
Suite B-1
+
 
+
 
Sarasota, FL 34234
 
Sarasota, FL 34234
 
+
</center>
 
+
{| align="center" border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1"
 
+
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
+
| colspan="3" style="background-color:#4f81bd;border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Release History'''</center>
+
 
+
 
|-
 
|-
| style="background-color:#f2f2f2;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Date'''</center>
+
|  
| style="background-color:#f2f2f2;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Software Version, Document Release #'''</center>
+
= '''Table of Contents'''<br/> =
| style="background-color:#f2f2f2;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
+
  
|-
+
*[[IPPBX IMM Intro|'''IPitomy's IP PBX (Intro)''']]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| June 01, 2010
+
**[[IPPBX IMM Getting Started|'''Getting Started''']]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Draft – Rev. 1
+
**[[IPPBX IMM DataNetworkConfig|'''Data Network Configuration''']]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| New release of documentation to include product upgrade Version v3.1-2458.
+
*[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdmin|'''System Administration Intro''']]
 
+
*[[IPPBX IMM AdminSystemNetworking|'''System Networking''']]
|-
+
*[[IP_PBX_Manual_System_Networking#UI_Users_.26_Groups|'''UI Users & Admin Groups''']]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| June 11, 2010
+
*[[IPPBX IMM AdminProviders|'''Providers''']]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Draft – Rev 2
+
*[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsIntro|'''Destinations Intro''']]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Incorporated new features and still updating to match current version v3.1.2458.
+
**[[IP PBX Manual Extensions|Extensions]]
 
+
***[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsExtAddDel|Add Del]]
|-
+
***[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsExtProvAutoDiscovery|Auto Discovery]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| June 25, 2010
+
***[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsExtEditPhoneSettings|Phone Configuration settings]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Draft – Final Version
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsGroups|Groups]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Draft submitted for technical review.
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsMenus|Menus]]
 
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsConferences|Conference]]
|-
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsVM|Voice Mail]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| June 28, 2010
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsSchedules|Schedule]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Draft – Final Version
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDestinationsBranchOffices|Branch Offices]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Updated document to include information for ACD table.
+
**[[IPPBX IMM Scheduled Calls|Scheduled Calls]]
 
+
*Applications
Update document for general formatting and style consistency.
+
**[[Call Recording]]
 
+
**[[Alerts]]
|-
+
**[[Room Management System]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| July 2, 2010
+
*[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminCallRouting|'''Call Routing''']]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Draft – Final Version
+
*'''PBXSetup'''
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Updated to include new fields for CID, Cascading Messages from 3.1.2595 release notes.
+
**[[IPPBX_IMM_SystemAdminDestinationsGroups#Add_Automatic_Call_Distribution_.28ACD.29_Agents|Agents]]
 
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupGeneralM|General]]
|-
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupDatabase|Database]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| September 23, 2010
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupVM|Voicemail]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 3.1-2598
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupSIPSetup|SIP Setup (Global)]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Fully updated to reflect the PBX up to v3.1-2598
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupPhone Global|Phone Global]]
 
+
**[[Mobile]]
|-
+
**[[Chat]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Oct 4, 1020
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupPrompts|Prompts]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 3.2.2
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupMOH|Music On Hold]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Updated manual to reflect v3.2.2
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupFeatureCodes|Feature Codes]]
 
+
**[[Screen Pop URL]]
|-
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminPBXSetupServices|Services]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| February 9, 2011
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminReporting|Reporting]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 4.0.1
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminReporting|Reports]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Updated manual to reflect v4.0.1, v3.4.1 and v3.4.2
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminDiagnostics|Diagnostics]]
 
+
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminMonitoring|Monitoring]]
|-
+
**[[Queue Monitoring]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0139in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| July 1, 2011
+
*Web Applications
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| 4.2.1
+
**[[Smart Personal Console]]
| style="border-top:0.0139in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0139in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0139in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Updated manual to reflect addition of Phoenix HD phones.
+
*Desktop Applications
 +
**[[Desktop Call Manager|Desktop Call Manager]]
 +
**[[Q_Manager|Queue Manager]]
 +
*Diagnostics
 +
**[[Network]]
 +
**[[Packet Capture]]
 +
*Appendicies
 +
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix1KeyTypesCodes|Appendix 1 Key Types, Codes]]
 +
**[[HD Phones|Appendix 2 HD Phones]]
 +
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix3SoftPhones|Appendix 3 Soft Phones]]
 +
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix4IPAddresses|Appendix 4 IP Addresses]]
 +
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix5DHCPSettings|Appendix 5 DHCP Settings]]
 +
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix6RouterConfiguration|Appendix 6 Router Configuration]]
 +
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix7NetworkConsole|Appendix 7 Network Console]]
 +
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix8SoftwareUpgrade|Appendix 8 Software Upgrade]]
 +
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix9AastraPhones|Appendix 9 Aastra Phones]]
 +
**[[IPPBX IMM SystemAdminAppendix10TroubleShooting|Appendix 10 Troubleshooting]]
 +
*[[IPPBX IMM Glossary|Glossary]]
  
 
|}
 
|}
'''TABLE OF CONTENT'''[#__RefHeading__1802_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 2]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1804_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2582_2124251758 Figure 1 – IPitomy IP PBX Systems and HD Phones 218]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2584_2124251758 Figure 2 – Hardware Setup Diagram 618]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2586_2124251758 Figure 3 – External Gateway Connection Diagram 818]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2588_2124251758 Figure 4 – SIP Provider Connection Diagram 818]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2590_2124251758 Figure 5 – LAN Connection Diagram 918]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2592_2124251758 Figure 6 – IP120 and IP1500 Connector Ports 918]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2594_2124251758 Figure 7 – Sample Setup Worksheet 1118]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2596_2124251758 Figure 8 – View of Upload Location Window 1218]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2598_2124251758 Figure 9 – Create Extension Results Page 1318]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2600_2124251758 Figure 10 – Port Forwarding Configuration Table 1418]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2602_2124251758 Figure 11 – Typical Network Configuration Diagram 1618]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2604_2124251758 Figure 12 – Administration Menu Options 1718]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2606_2124251758 Figure 13 – Standard Page Layout and Features 1818]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2608_2124251758 Figure 14 – View of Mouse Over Field Information 1918]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2610_2124251758 Figure 15 – IP PBX ADMIN Login Page 2018]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2612_2124251758 Figure 16 – Networking Setup Page 2118]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2614_2124251758 Figure 17 – PBX Host Access Page 2318]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2616_2124251758 Figure 18 – Web Server Configuration Page 2418]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2618_2124251758 Figure 19 – Access Control List - Add New Rule Section 2818]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2620_2124251758 Figure 20 – Access Control List Page - Add New Service Section 2918]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2622_2124251758 Figure 21 – Hardware Providers Trunk Setup Page 3218]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2624_2124251758 Figure 22 – Add/Edit Hardware Provider Configuration Page 3518]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2626_2124251758 Figure 23 – SIP Providers Configuration Main Page 3918]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2628_2124251758 Figure 24 – Add/Edit SIP Provider Configuration Page 1 4018]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2630_2124251758 Figure 25 – Add/Edit SIP Provider Configuration Page 2 4118]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2632_2124251758 Figure 26 – IP PBX Data Components 4718]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2634_2124251758 Figure 27 – Extensions Add/Import Page 4918]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2636_2124251758 Figure 28 – Create Extensions Page 4918]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2638_2124251758 Figure 29 – Search Extension Page 5118]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2640_2124251758 Figure 30 – Extensions View Page 5218]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2642_2124251758 Figure 31 - Extensions View Tab (Mass Edit Feature) 5318]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2644_2124251758 Figure 32 – Extensions General Settings Section 5518]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2646_2124251758 Figure 33 – Extensions Forward Settings Section 5718]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2648_2124251758 Figure 34 – Extensions Advanced Network Settings Page 6019]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2650_2124251758 Figure 35 – Extensions Voicemail Settings Section 6319]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2652_2124251758 Figure 36 – Extensions CODECS Settings Page 6619]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2654_2124251758 Figure 37 – Extensions Calling Permissions Section 6719]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2656_2124251758 Figure 38 – Extensions Advanced Settings Follow Me Setup Page 6919]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2658_2124251758 Figure 39 – Extensions Auto-Discovery Tab 7119]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2660_2124251758 Figure 40 – Auto-Discovery Device Color Legend 7219]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2662_2124251758 Figure 41 – Auto- Discovery Device Values 7319]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2664_2124251758 Figure 42 – Auto-Discovery Edit Selected Functions 7419]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2666_2124251758 Figure 43 – Auto-Discovery View Settings Page 7519]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2668_2124251758 Figure 44 – Auto-Discovery Advanced Filter Settings 7619]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2670_2124251758 Figure 45 – Auto-Discovery Advanced Scan Settings Page 7719]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2672_2124251758 Figure 46 – Auto-Discovery Command Functions Page 7819]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2674_2124251758 Figure 47 – Extension Listing 8019]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2676_2124251758 Figure 48 – Edit Phone Key Settings Page 8119]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2678_2124251758 Figure 49 – Edit Phone Audio Settings Page 8219]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2680_2124251758 Figure 50 - Edit Phone SIP/Network Settings Page 8319]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2682_2124251758 Figure 51 - Edit Phone Display Settings Page 8419]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2684_2124251758 Figure 52 – Edit Phone Expansion Module Settings Page 8519]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2686_2124251758 Figure 53 – Ring Groups Page 8719]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2688_2124251758 Figure 54 – Edit Ring Group Page 8919]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2690_2124251758 Figure 55 – Advanced Ring Group and Custom Caller ID Settings Section 9219]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2692_2124251758 Figure 56 – Edit Members/Agents Section 9419]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2694_2124251758 Figure 57 – ACD Edit Agents Page 9919]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2696_2124251758 Figure 58 – Multicast Paging Groups Page 10119]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2698_2124251758 Figure 59 – Edit Page Group Window 10119]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2700_2124251758 Figure 60 – Ring Group Live Queue Data 10419]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2702_2124251758 Figure 61 – Menus Page 10719]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2704_2124251758 Figure 62 – Edit Menus Page (with Control Menu Prompts open) 10819]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2706_2124251758 Figure 63 – Advanced Menu Settings Page 11119]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2708_2124251758 Figure 64 – Remote Menu Announcement DTMF Admin Flow 11219]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2710_2124251758 Figure 65 – Conferences Page 11319]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2712_2124251758 Figure 66 - Edit Conference 11319]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2714_2124251758 Figure 67 – Features Code Page 11519]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2716_2124251758 Figure 68 – Edit Voicemail Box Settings Page 11619]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2718_2124251758 Figure 69 – Notification Settings / Voicemail Box Page 12220]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2720_2124251758 Figure 70 – Edit Schedule and Holidays Page 12420]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2722_2124251758 Figure 71 – Sample Branch Office Networking 12720]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2724_2124251758 Figure 72 – Edit Branch Office Page 12820]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2726_2124251758 Figure 73 – Branch Offices Page 13020]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2728_2124251758 Figure 74 – Branch Office Extension Section 13320]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2730_2124251758 Figure 75 – Show Extensions Page 13420]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2732_2124251758 Figure 76 – Incoming Call Routing Page 13520]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2734_2124251758 Figure 77 – Incoming Routing Edit Incoming DID CID Page 13820]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2736_2124251758 Figure 78 – Outgoing Routing Page 14020]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2738_2124251758 Figure 79 – Add New Outgoing Route Page 14120]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2740_2124251758 Figure 80 - Class of Service 14520]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2742_2124251758 Figure 81 – Blocking Dialing 1-900 14620]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2744_2124251758 Figure 82 – Least Cost Routing Example 14720]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2746_2124251758 Figure 83 – Information (411) Subroute Setting 14820]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2748_2124251758 Figure 84 – PBX Admin Settings Section 14920]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2750_2124251758 Figure 85 – PBX General Settings Section 15020]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2752_2124251758 Figure 86 – PBX Security Log Watch and Ban Service Status 15320]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2754_2124251758 Figure 87 – Security Log Watch and Ban Security Settings 15320]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2756_2124251758 Figure 88 – PBX Time Settings Section 15520]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2758_2124251758 Figure 89 – Outbound Transfer Numbers Section 15720]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2760_2124251758 Figure 90 – InGenius Connector Settings Section 15820]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2762_2124251758 Figure 91 – Create Backup Section 15920]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2764_2124251758 Figure 92 – PBX Database Automatic Backups Section 16020]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2766_2124251758 Figure 93 – PBX Database Upload Backup File Section 16120]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2768_2124251758 Figure 94 – Backup Date/Time Information 16320]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2770_2124251758 Figure 95 – PBX Voicemail General Settings Section 16420]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2772_2124251758 Figure 96 – PBX Voicemail Menu Section 16520]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2774_2124251758 Figure 97 – PBX Voicemail Settings Section 16720]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2776_2124251758 Figure 98 – PBX Voicemail Archive Section 16920]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2778_2124251758 Figure 99 – PBX Voicemail Listing Page 17120]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2780_2124251758 Figure 100 – SIP Networking Settings Page 17220]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2782_2124251758 Figure 101 – SIP Advanced Settings Page 17720]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2784_2124251758 Figure 102 – Phone Global Page 18120]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2786_2124251758 Figure 103 – Upload Voice Prompt Section 18320]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2788_2124251758 Figure 104 – Record New Voice Prompt Section 18321]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1806_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 18]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2790_2124251758 Figure 105 – Prompt Files on the Server Section 18521]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2792_2124251758 Figure 106 – System Default Music on Hold Section 18621]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2794_2124251758 Figure 107 – Create a Playlist Section 18721]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2796_2124251758 Figure 108 – Music on Hold Playlist 18821]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2798_2124251758 Figure 109 – Features Code Speed Dialing Section 18921]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2800_2124251758 Figure 110 – Services System Information Page 19121]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2802_2124251758 Figure 111 – Services Download License Information Section 19221]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2804_2124251758 Figure 112 – Services Assign Licenses Page 19421]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2806_2124251758 Figure 113 – Services System Functions Section 19521]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2808_2124251758 Figure 114 - Services Load File System Section 19721]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2810_2124251758 Figure 115 – Services TFTP Files Section 19821]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2812_2124251758 Figure 116 – Services Log File Settings Section 19921]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2814_2124251758 Figure 117 – Services Logging Level Section 20021]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2816_2124251758 Figure 118 – Services Call Event Log Section 20121]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2818_2124251758 Figure 119 – Services Automated Phone Firmware Updates 20221]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2820_2124251758 Figure 120 - Scheduled Calling 20321]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2822_2124251758 Figure 121 - List of Scheduled Calls 20321]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2824_2124251758 Figure 122 - Edit Scheduled Call 20521]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2826_2124251758 Figure 123 - Recurrence 20621]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2828_2124251758 Figure 124 – CDR Reports Page 20821]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2830_2124251758 Figure 125 – Queue Graphs Page 21221]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2832_2124251758 Figure 126 – Reports Queue Graph Overview Tab 21321]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2834_2124251758 Figure 127 – Reports Queue Graphs Agents Tab 21421]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2836_2124251758 Figure 128 – Reports Queue Graphs Tab 21521]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2838_2124251758 Figure 129 – Reports Queue Graphs Logs Tab 21521]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2840_2124251758 Figure 130 – System Diagnostics Page 21621]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2842_2124251758 Figure 131 – Monitoring Page 21721]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2844_2124251758 Figure 132 – Edit Phone Settings Page 23621]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2846_2124251758 Figure 133 – Aastra Advanced Phone Settings Page 24121]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2848_2124251758 Table 1 – IP PBX Features 422]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2850_2124251758 Table 2 – Setup Worksheet Descriptions 1222]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2852_2124251758 Table 3 – Sample Exported .CSV Worksheet 1222]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2854_2124251758 Table 4 – Feature and Link Descriptions 1822]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2856_2124251758 Table 5 – Navigational Buttons and Links 1922]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2858_2124251758 Table 6 – Network Setting Descriptions 2222]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2860_2124251758 Table 7 – Network Features and Descriptions 2322]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2862_2124251758 Table 8 – Web Server Features and Descriptions 2422]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2864_2124251758 Table 9 – Access Control List Definitions 2922]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2866_2124251758 Table 10 – Add New Service Settings and Descriptions 3022]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2868_2124251758 Table 11 – Add New Rule Settings and Descriptions 3022]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2870_2124251758 Table 12 – Hardware Trunk Provider Settings and Descriptions 3422]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2872_2124251758 Table 13 – Hardware Provider Configuration Settings and Descriptions 3822]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2874_2124251758 Table 14 – SIP Provider Configuration Settings and Descriptions 4422]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2876_2124251758 Table 15 – Create Extension Fields and Descriptions 5022]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2878_2124251758 Table 16 – Search Extension Parameters and Description 5122]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2880_2124251758 Table 17 – General Extension Settings and Descriptions 5622]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2882_2124251758 Table 18 – Extension Forward Settings and Descriptions 5722]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2884_2124251758 Table 19 – Extensions Advanced Networking Settings and Descriptions 6222]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2886_2124251758 Table 20 – Voice Mail Settings and Descriptions 6522]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2888_2124251758 Table 21 – Extensions CODECS Settings and Recommendations 6622]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2890_2124251758 Table 22 – Calling Permission Settings and Descriptions 6822]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2892_2124251758 Table 23 – Extensions Follow Me Settings and Descriptions 7022]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2894_2124251758 Table 24 – Auto-Discovery Scan Details 7322]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2896_2124251758 Table 25 – Auto-Discovery Edit Selected Tab Functions and Descriptions 7422]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2898_2124251758 Table 26 – Auto-Discovery Functions and Descriptions 7622]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2900_2124251758 Table 27 – Advanced Filter Settings and Descriptions 7722]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2902_2124251758 Table 28 – Auto-Discovery Advanced Scan Settings and Descriptions 7822]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2904_2124251758 Table 29 – Auto-Discovery Command Settings and Descriptions 7822]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2906_2124251758 Table 30 – Edit Key Settings and Descriptions 8122]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2908_2124251758 Table 31 - Edit Phone Audio Settings and Descriptions 8322]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2910_2124251758 Table 32 – Edit Phone SIP/Network Settings and Descriptions 8422]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2912_2124251758 Table 33 – Edit Phone Display Settings and Descriptions 8522]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2914_2124251758 Table 34 – Edit Phone Expansion Module Settings and Descriptions 8623]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1808_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 22]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2916_2124251758 Table 35 – Edit Ring Group Settings and Descriptions 9023]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2918_2124251758 Table 36 – Advanced Ring Group and Custom Caller ID Settings and ][#__RefHeading__2918_2124251758 Descriptions 9223]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2920_2124251758 Table 37 – Edit Members/Agents Settings and Descriptions 9423]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2922_2124251758 Table 38 – Automatic Call Distribution (Agents) Page 9623]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2924_2124251758 Table 39 – Edit Ring Group ACD Agents Settings and Descriptions 9823]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2926_2124251758 Table 40 – Add/Edit Agent Features and Descriptions 9923]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2928_2124251758 Table 41 – Multicast Paging Settings and Descriptions 10223]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2930_2124251758 Table 42 – Live Queue Fields and Descriptions 10523]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2932_2124251758 Table 43 – Add/Edit Settings and Descriptions 10923]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2934_2124251758 Table 44 – Advanced Settings and Description 11123]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2936_2124251758 Table 45 – Conference Settings and Descriptions 11423]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2938_2124251758 Table 46 – Features Code Settings and Descriptions 11523]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2940_2124251758 Table 47 - Voice Mailbox Settings and Descriptions 11823]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2942_2124251758 Table 48 – Notification and Voicemail Box Settings and Descriptions 12323]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2944_2124251758 Table 49 – Edit Schedule Settings and Descriptions 12523]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2946_2124251758 Table 50 – Branch Office Settings and Descriptions 12923]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2948_2124251758 Table 51 – Incoming Call Routing Settings and Descriptions 13623]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2950_2124251758 Table 52 - Outbound Routing Page Descriptions 13923]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2952_2124251758 Table 53 – Outbound Route Settings and Descriptions 14323]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2954_2124251758 Table 54 – Block 1900 Outbound Call Configuration 14723]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2956_2124251758 Table 55 – Least Cost Outbound Call Subroute Configuration 14823]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2958_2124251758 Table 56 – Information (411) Subroute Configuration 14923]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2960_2124251758 Table 57 – PBX Admin Settings Parameters and Descriptions 15023]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2962_2124251758 Table 58 – General PBX Admin Settings and Descriptions 15123]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2964_2124251758 Table 59 – PBX Security Log Watch/Ban Settings and Descriptions 15423]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2966_2124251758 Table 60 – PBX Time Settings and Descriptions 15523]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2968_2124251758 Table 61 – Create Backup Settings and Descriptions 15923]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2970_2124251758 Table 62 – PBX Database Automatic Backup Settings and Descriptions 16123]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2972_2124251758 Table 63 - Saved Backups 16223]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2974_2124251758 Table 64 – PBX General Settings and Descriptions 16523]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2976_2124251758 Table 65 – PBX Voicemail Menu Setting and Descriptions 16623]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2978_2124251758 Table 66 – PBX Voicemail Settings and Descriptions 16823]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2980_2124251758 Table 67 – PBX Voicemail Archive Settings and Descriptions 16923]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2982_2124251758 Table 68 – SIP Networking Settings and Descriptions 17324]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2984_2124251758 Table 69 – SIP Advanced Settings and Descriptions 18024]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2986_2124251758 Table 70 - Phone Global Settings and Descriptions 18224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2988_2124251758 Table 71 – Features Code Settings and Descriptions 18924]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2990_2124251758 Table 72 – Services System Settings and Descriptions 19224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2992_2124251758 Table 73 - License Info Descriptions 19324]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2994_2124251758 Table 74 – Services System Functions and Descriptions 19624]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2996_2124251758 Table 75 – Services Log File Settings and Descriptions 19924]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2998_2124251758 Table 76 – Services Logging Levels and Descriptions 20024]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3000_2124251758 Table 77 – Services Call Event Logging and Descriptions 20124]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3002_2124251758 Table 78 – Services Automated Firmware Parameters and Descriptions 20224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3004_2124251758 Table 79 - Scheduled Call List Descriptions 20424]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3006_2124251758 Table 80 - Edit Scheduled Call Descriptions 20524]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3008_2124251758 Table 81 - Recurrence Descriptions 20624]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3010_2124251758 Table 82 - CDR Report Descriptions 20924]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3012_2124251758 Table 83 – Queue Graphs Search Parameters 21224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3014_2124251758 Table 84 – Edit Phone Settings and Descriptions 23724]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3016_2124251758 Table 85 – Edit Advanced Phone Settings – IPitomy Phones 23824]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3018_2124251758 Table 86 – Edit Advanced Phone Settings for IPitomy Phones 24024]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__3020_2124251758 Table 87 – Aastra Advanced Phone Settings and Descriptions 24224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1810_2124251758 Introduction1]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1812_2124251758 About the IPitomy IP PBX1]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1814_2124251758 Benefits of VoIP Technology1]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1816_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Features1]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1818_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 2]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1820_2124251758 Extensions3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1822_2124251758 Groups3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1824_2124251758 Menus (Automated Attendant)3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1826_2124251758 DTMF Menu Administration3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1828_2124251758 Advanced Routing Functions3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1830_2124251758 Voicemail and Unified Messaging3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1832_2124251758 Directory3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1834_2124251758 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Numbers3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1836_2124251758 Conferencing (Meet Me)3]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1838_2124251758 FollowMe4]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1840_2124251758 Forwarding Gateway4]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1842_2124251758 Cascading Message Notification4]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1844_2124251758 Voicemail Gateway4]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1846_2124251758 Branch Offices4]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1848_2124251758 Getting Started5]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1852_2124251758 Boot Up – Safe Power Down5]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1854_2124251758 Connecting the System6]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1856_2124251758 Hardware Setup6]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1858_2124251758 Connecting the Phone Lines6]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1860_2124251758 INTERNAL ANALOG LINE CARDS6]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1862_2124251758 INTERNAL DIGITAL T1 CARDS7]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1864_2124251758 Connecting Using an External Gateway 7]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1850_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 6]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1866_2124251758 Connecting to a LAN8]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1868_2124251758 Connecting Using SIP Providers8]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1870_2124251758 Connecting Telephones9]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1872_2124251758 DATA and network CONFIGURATION10]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1876_2124251758 Setup Worksheet10]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1874_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 10]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1878_2124251758 CSV Upload12]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1880_2124251758 Network Requirements13]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1882_2124251758 Port Forwarding14]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1884_2124251758 IP Addresses15]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1886_2124251758 Changing the IP Address15]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1888_2124251758 Service Providers16]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1890_2124251758 System Administration17]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1892_2124251758 Administration Menu17]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1894_2124251758 IP PBX Administration Options17]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1896_2124251758 Administration Page Layout18]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1898_2124251758 Navigational Tools19]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1900_2124251758 Login Page20]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1902_2124251758 Logging In20]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1904_2124251758 Logging Out20]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1906_2124251758 System Networking21]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1908_2124251758 TCP/IP Settings Section22]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1910_2124251758 Edit TCP/IP Default Settings22]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1912_2124251758 Access Control (PBX Access)22]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1914_2124251758 Host Access22]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1916_2124251758 Web Server Configuration 23]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1918_2124251758 Add New Permission25]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1920_2124251758 Load Factory Default25]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1922_2124251758 Access Control List27]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1924_2124251758 Load Recommended Default29]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1926_2124251758 Add New Service29]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1928_2124251758 Add New Rule31]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1948_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 17]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1930_2124251758 Delete Rules or Services31]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1932_2124251758 Providers31]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1934_2124251758 Hardware Trunks31]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1936_2124251758 Connection Types31]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1938_2124251758 Provisioning a New Hardware Trunk Group32]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1940_2124251758 Configuring Hardware Trunks34]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1942_2124251758 Add Phone Numbers to Hardware Provider38]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1944_2124251758 Remove Phone Numbers from Hardware Provider39]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1946_2124251758 Provisioning SIP Providers39]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1950_2124251758 Add New SIP Provider44]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1952_2124251758 Add Phone Numbers45]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1954_2124251758 Remove Phone Numbers45]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1956_2124251758 Set Destination45]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1958_2124251758 Delete SIP Provider46]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1960_2124251758 Destinations47]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1962_2124251758 Extensions48]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1964_2124251758 Add/Import Tab48]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1966_2124251758 Add/Create Extensions50]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1968_2124251758 Search Tab51]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1970_2124251758 Search Extension51]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2004_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 47]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1972_2124251758 View Tab (Extensions)52]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1974_2124251758 Edit or View Extension52]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1976_2124251758 Mass Edit PBX Extension Settings52]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1978_2124251758 Mass Edit Phone Key Settings53]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1980_2124251758 Delete Extension54]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1982_2124251758 Delete Multiple Extension54]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1984_2124251758 Extensions - General Settings Section 55]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1986_2124251758 Extensions - Forward Settings Section 57]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1988_2124251758 Enable/Disable Forward Settings58]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1990_2124251758 Change Unconditional Forwarding via Keypad58]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1992_2124251758 Change Unconditional Forwarding via PC59]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1994_2124251758 Change Forwarding Number While Away from an Extension59]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1996_2124251758 Extensions - Advanced Settings60]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__1998_2124251758 Extensions - Network Settings Section60]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2000_2124251758 Edit Extensions - Network Settings62]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2002_2124251758 Extensions - Voicemail Settings Section 63]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2006_2124251758 Edit Voicemail Settings65]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2008_2124251758 Extensions - Allow CODECs Section66]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2010_2124251758 Edit CODEC Settings66]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2012_2124251758 Extensions Calling Permissions Section67]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2014_2124251758 Add/Edit Calling Permissions68]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2016_2124251758 Extensions - Follow-Me Section69]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2018_2124251758 Add/Edit Follow Me Settings70]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2020_2124251758 Provisioning - Auto-Discovery Tab71]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2022_2124251758 Start Auto-Discovery Scan71]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2024_2124251758 List of Devices & Extensions72]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2026_2124251758 Device Information73]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2028_2124251758 Edit Selected Tab74]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2030_2124251758 Create, Assign and Configure Phone74]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2032_2124251758 View Settings Tab75]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2034_2124251758 Advanced Filter Settings76]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2036_2124251758 Advanced Scan Settings77]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2038_2124251758 Commands Tab78]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2040_2124251758 Factory Default Phone79]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2042_2124251758 Troubleshooting Network Scanning Problems79]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2044_2124251758 Auto Provisioning Phone Settings from Actual Device80]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2046_2124251758 Edit Phone Settings80]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2048_2124251758 View Phone Settings80]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2050_2124251758 Edit Phone Settings81]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2052_2124251758 Key Settings81]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2054_2124251758 Audio Settings82]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2056_2124251758 SIP/Network Settings83]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2058_2124251758 83]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2060_2124251758 Dispaly Settings84]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2062_2124251758 Expansion Module Settings85]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2064_2124251758 Groups86]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2066_2124251758 Ring Group Examples87]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2068_2124251758 Example Ring Group 1 – Departmental Grouping87]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2070_2124251758 Example Ring Group 2 – Regional Sales Grouping88]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2072_2124251758 Add/Edit New Ring Group89]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2074_2124251758 Ring Group Advanced Settings92]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2076_2124251758 Edit Advanced Ring Group Settings93]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2078_2124251758 Edit Custom Caller ID Settings93]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2080_2124251758 Edit Members/Agents94]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2082_2124251758 94]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2084_2124251758 Add Agents/Members to the Group95]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2086_2124251758 Delete Agents/Members from the Group95]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2088_2124251758 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)96]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2090_2124251758 Edit Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Settings98]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2092_2124251758 Add Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Agents99]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2094_2124251758 Edit Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Agent100]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2096_2124251758 Delete Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Agent100]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2098_2124251758 Multicast Paging Group101]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2100_2124251758 Add Multicast Paging Group102]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2102_2124251758 Edit Multicast Paging Group103]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2104_2124251758 Delete Multicast Paging Group103]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2106_2124251758 Live Queue Data104]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2108_2124251758 Live Queue Data – Wallboard105]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2110_2124251758 Activate Live Call Queue Wallboard105]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2112_2124251758 Menus107]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2114_2124251758 Edit Menu108]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2116_2124251758 Add Menu Settings109]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2118_2124251758 Edit Menu Settings110]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2120_2124251758 Delete Menu Settings110]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2122_2124251758 Advanced Menu Settings111]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2124_2124251758 Conferences113]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2126_2124251758 Add/Edit Conference114]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2128_2124251758 Conference Feature Codes115]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2130_2124251758 Voicemail 116]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2132_2124251758 Add Voicemail Settings118]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2134_2124251758 Edit Voicemail Settings119]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2136_2124251758 Clear Voicemail Messages119]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2138_2124251758 Delete Voicemail Box119]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2140_2124251758 Broadcast Message – Add120]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2142_2124251758 Broadcast Message – Remove120]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2144_2124251758 Cascading Message Notification120]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2146_2124251758 Set Cascading Messages121]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2148_2124251758 Setting Cascading Interval121]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2150_2124251758 Configure Contact Numbers for Cascading Message Notification122]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2152_2124251758 Schedules124]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2154_2124251758 Add Schedule125]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2156_2124251758 Add Holiday to Schedule125]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2158_2124251758 Remove Holiday from Schedule126]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2160_2124251758 Edit Schedule126]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2162_2124251758 Delete Schedule126]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2164_2124251758 Branch Offices127]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2166_2124251758 Configuring Office 1 130]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2168_2124251758 Configuring Office 2 131]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2170_2124251758 Edit Branch Office132]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2172_2124251758 Delete Branch Office132]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2174_2124251758 Branch Extensions 132]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2176_2124251758 Configuring Office 2 with Branch Extensions133]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2178_2124251758 View Branch Office Extensions134]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2180_2124251758 Call Routing135]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2182_2124251758 Incoming Call Routing135]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2184_2124251758 Set Default Incoming Destination136]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2186_2124251758 Set Provider Trunk Incoming Destination137]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2188_2124251758 Enable/Disable Day/Night Mode137]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2190_2124251758 Switch Day/Night Mode137]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2192_2124251758 Edit Hours138]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2194_2124251758 Edit Incoming Caller DID138]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2196_2124251758 Outgoing Call Routing139]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2200_2124251758 Add Outgoing Route143]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2202_2124251758 Edit Outgoing Route143]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2204_2124251758 Delete Outgoing Route144]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2206_2124251758 Class of Service145]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2208_2124251758 Outgoing Call Routing146]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2210_2124251758 Configure Block Calls Subroutes146]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2212_2124251758 Configure Least Cost Routing Subroutes147]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2214_2124251758 Configure Information (411/1411) Subroute148]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2216_2124251758 PBX Setup149]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2218_2124251758 General System Setup 149]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2220_2124251758 Admin Settings Section149]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2222_2124251758 Edit Admin Settings150]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2224_2124251758 General Settings Section150]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2226_2124251758 Edit General PBX Settings151]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2228_2124251758 Security Settings Section153]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2230_2124251758 Log Watch/Ban Service153]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2232_2124251758 Enable Log Watch/Ban Service 153]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2234_2124251758 Set Log Watch/Ban Service Parameters153]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2236_2124251758 Configure Log Watch/Ban Service 154]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2238_2124251758 Disable Log Set Security Setting155]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2240_2124251758 Time Settings Section155]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2242_2124251758 Set Time Settings156]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2244_2124251758 Outbound Transfers Numbers Section157]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2246_2124251758 Add Outbound Transfers157]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2248_2124251758 Delete Outbound Transfers157]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2250_2124251758 InGenius Connector 158]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2252_2124251758 Database Administration159]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2254_2124251758 Create Backup Section159]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2256_2124251758 Creating a Backup159]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2258_2124251758 Automatic Backups Section160]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2260_2124251758 Set Automatic Backup161]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2262_2124251758 Upload Backup File Section161]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2264_2124251758 Upload Backup Files162]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2266_2124251758 Backup Storage Section162]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2268_2124251758 Delete Backup File163]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2270_2124251758 Restore Backup File163]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2272_2124251758 Download Backup File164]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2274_2124251758 Voicemail Setup164]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2276_2124251758 General Settings Section164]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2278_2124251758 Set General Voicemail Settings165]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2280_2124251758 Voicemail Menu Section165]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2282_2124251758 Set Voicemail Menu Options166]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2284_2124251758 E-mail Settings Section167]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2286_2124251758 Set E-mail Settings168]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2288_2124251758 Test Settings Button168]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2290_2124251758 Voicemail Archive Section169]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2292_2124251758 Download Voicemail Archive Settings169]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2294_2124251758 Erase Voicemail Archive Settings170]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2296_2124251758 Upload Voicemail Archive Settings170]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2298_2124251758 View Voicemail Listing (Usage Space)170]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2300_2124251758 SIP Setup172]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2302_2124251758 SIP Networking Settings Section172]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2304_2124251758 Add SIP Networking Settings173]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2306_2124251758 Delete SIP Networking Settings173]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2308_2124251758 SIP Advanced Settings Section174]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2198_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 113]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2310_2124251758 Edit Advanced SIP Networking Settings180]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2312_2124251758 Phone Global181]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2314_2124251758 Controls settings for firmware/kernel upgrades, as well as HTTP configuration download options for phones.181]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2316_2124251758 Prompts182]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2318_2124251758 Upload Voice Prompt Section183]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2320_2124251758 Upload Voice Prompt183]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2322_2124251758 Record New Voice Prompt Section183]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2324_2124251758 Record New Voice Prompt183]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2326_2124251758 Prompt Files on Server Section185]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2328_2124251758 Delete Prompt Files on Server185]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2330_2124251758 Download Prompt Files on Server185]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2332_2124251758 Music on Hold186]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2334_2124251758 Systems Default Music on Hold Section186]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2336_2124251758 Set Default Music on Hold Section186]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2338_2124251758 Create a Playlist Section187]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2340_2124251758 Add New Music on Hold187]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2342_2124251758 Upload Music Files188]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2344_2124251758 Delete Music Files on Server188]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2346_2124251758 Feature Codes189]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2348_2124251758 Speed Dialing Section189]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2350_2124251758 Add Speed Dialing 189]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2352_2124251758 Edit Speed Dialing 190]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2354_2124251758 Delete Speed Dialing190]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2356_2124251758 Import/Export Speed Dialing List (CSV)190]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2358_2124251758 Services191]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2362_2124251758 System Information Section191]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2364_2124251758 View System Information 192]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2366_2124251758 License Information Section192]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2368_2124251758 Upload License File 193]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2370_2124251758 Download License File 193]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2372_2124251758 Assign Single User License194]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2374_2124251758 Assign Multiple User Licenses195]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2376_2124251758 System Functions Section195]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2378_2124251758 Restart PBX196]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2380_2124251758 Reboot PBX196]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2382_2124251758 Restart Services196]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2384_2124251758 Restart Call Manager197]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2386_2124251758 Clear Diagnostics197]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2388_2124251758 Load File System197]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2390_2124251758 TFTP Files198]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2392_2124251758 Load TFTP File198]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2394_2124251758 Download TFTP File198]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2396_2124251758 Delete TFTP File198]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2398_2124251758 Log File Settings199]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2400_2124251758 Select Log File Settings199]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2402_2124251758 Logging Level Section200]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2404_2124251758 Select Logging Level200]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2406_2124251758 Call Event Log Section201]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2408_2124251758 Set Call Event Logging201]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2410_2124251758 Automated Phone Firmware Updates202]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2412_2124251758 Set Automated Firmware Update Parameters202]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2414_2124251758 Check for New Firmware Now202]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2416_2124251758 Scheduled Calling203]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2360_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 186]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2418_2124251758 Reporting208]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2420_2124251758 Reports208]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2422_2124251758 View CDR Report – Smart Personal Console210]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2424_2124251758 View CDR Report – PBX Administration211]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2426_2124251758 Export CDR Report211]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2428_2124251758 Queue Graphs 211]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2430_2124251758 Run Queue Graph Report212]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2432_2124251758 Overview Tab213]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2434_2124251758 Agents Tab214]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2436_2124251758 Graph Tab215]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2438_2124251758 Logs Tab215]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2440_2124251758 Diagnostics216]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2442_2124251758 View System Diagnostics216]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2444_2124251758 Monitoring217]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2446_2124251758 Appendices218]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2448_2124251758 Appendix 1: Key Types and Codes218]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2450_2124251758 Appendix 2: IP Telephones221]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2452_2124251758 IPitomy 550221]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2454_2124251758 IPitomy 55i221]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2456_2124251758 IPitomy 53i221]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2458_2124251758 IPitomy 53i IP Phone222]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2460_2124251758 IPitomy 57i 222]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2462_2124251758 6739i222]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2464_2124251758 IP120223]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2466_2124251758 IP51i223]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2468_2124251758 IPitomy 536M223]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2470_2124251758 IPitomy 560M223]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2472_2124251758 Appendix 3: Softphones224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2474_2124251758 CounterPath™ eyeBeam® 1.5 and X-Lite® 3.0224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2476_2124251758 What is a Softphone?224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2478_2124251758 X-Lite® 3.0 Free Softphone224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2480_2124251758 eyeBeam® 1.5 (Pricing available at www.counterpath.com)224]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2482_2124251758 Softphone Installation225]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2484_2124251758 Forward Settings226]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2486_2124251758 Provisioning Forward Settings226]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2488_2124251758 Changing a Forwarding Number from an Extension226]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2490_2124251758 Changing a Forwarding Number from a PC227]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2492_2124251758 Changing a Forwarding Number While Away from an Extension227]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2494_2124251758 Advanced Settings227]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2496_2124251758 Network Settings227]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2498_2124251758 Appendix 4: IP Addresses228]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2500_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 228]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2502_2124251758 Determining Local Network Address (on a Microsoft][#__RefHeading__2502_2124251758 ][#__RefHeading__2502_2124251758  Windows][#__RefHeading__2502_2124251758 ][#__RefHeading__2502_2124251758  Machine)228]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2504_2124251758 Determining an Available IP Address228]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2506_2124251758 Appendix 5: DHCP Settings229]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2508_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 229]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2510_2124251758 Leasing Time for an IP Address229]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2512_2124251758 Determining/Viewing DHCP Settings on a Linksys][#__RefHeading__2512_2124251758 ][#__RefHeading__2512_2124251758  Router229]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2514_2124251758 Tips for Understanding the IP Address List229]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2516_2124251758 Appendix 6: Router Configuration230]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2518_2124251758 Appendix 7: Network Console230]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2520_2124251758 Accessing the Network Console230]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2522_2124251758 Selecting Options230]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2524_2124251758 Menus231]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2526_2124251758 Menu Location231]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2528_2124251758 Using the “Live” System Settings231]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2530_2124251758 Database Settings231]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2532_2124251758 Command Options231]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2534_2124251758 Refresh View [R]231]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2536_2124251758 Default Settings [D]231]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2538_2124251758 Save & Update [S]231]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2540_2124251758 Disable [Z]231]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2542_2124251758 Network Type232]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2544_2124251758 DHCP232]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2546_2124251758 Acquiring a DHCP Lease232]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2548_2124251758 Renewing DHCP Lease232]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2550_2124251758 Other Menus232]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2552_2124251758 Web Server232]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2554_2124251758 Host Access232]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2556_2124251758 Fix Database233]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2558_2124251758 Tips for Using the IPitomy IP PBX Network Console233]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2560_2124251758 Appendix 8: Software Upgrade234]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2562_2124251758 Appendix 9: IP550, IP120, and aastra phones236]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2564_2124251758 Edit Phone Settings236]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2566_2124251758 Edit Advance Phone Settings238]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2570_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 230]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2568_2124251758 Edit Advance Phone Settings – Aastra Phones241]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2572_2124251758 Appendix 10: Troubleshooting (FAQ)243]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2574_2124251758 Glossary244]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2576_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 244]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2578_2124251758 Notes:250]
 
 
[#__RefHeading__2580_2124251758 IPitomy IP PBX Admin Guide 250]'''LIST OF FIGURES'''
 
 
'''Figure 1 – IPitomy IP PBX Systems and HD Phones2'''
 
 
'''Figure 2 – Hardware Setup Diagram6'''
 
 
'''Figure 3 – External Gateway Connection Diagram8'''
 
 
'''Figure 4 – SIP Provider Connection Diagram8'''
 
 
'''Figure 5 – LAN Connection Diagram9'''
 
 
'''Figure 6 – IP120 and IP1500 Connector Ports9'''
 
 
'''Figure 7 – Sample Setup Worksheet11'''
 
 
'''Figure 8 – View of Upload Location Window12'''
 
 
'''Figure 9 – Create Extension Results Page13'''
 
 
'''Figure 10 – Port Forwarding Configuration Table14'''
 
 
'''Figure 11 – Typical Network Configuration Diagram 16'''
 
 
'''Figure 12 – Administration Menu Options17'''
 
 
'''Figure 13 – Standard Page Layout and Features18'''
 
 
'''Figure 14 – View of Mouse Over Field Information19'''
 
 
'''Figure 15 – IP PBX ADMIN Login Page20'''
 
 
'''Figure 16 – Networking Setup Page21'''
 
 
'''Figure 17 – PBX Host Access Page23'''
 
 
'''Figure 18 – Web Server Configuration Page24'''
 
 
'''Figure 19 – Access Control List - Add New Rule Section28'''
 
 
'''Figure 20 – Access Control List Page - Add New Service Section29'''
 
 
'''Figure 21 – Hardware Providers Trunk Setup Page32'''
 
 
'''Figure 22 – Add/Edit Hardware Provider Configuration Page35'''
 
 
'''Figure 23 – SIP Providers Configuration Main Page39'''
 
 
'''Figure 24 – Add/Edit SIP Provider Configuration Page 140'''
 
 
'''Figure 25 – Add/Edit SIP Provider Configuration Page 241'''
 
 
'''Figure 26 – IP PBX Data Components47'''
 
 
'''Figure 27 – Extensions Add/Import Page49'''
 
 
'''Figure 28 – Create Extensions Page49'''
 
 
'''Figure 29 – Search Extension Page51'''
 
 
'''Figure 30 – Extensions View Page52'''
 
 
'''Figure 31 - Extensions View Tab (Mass Edit Feature)53'''
 
 
'''Figure 32 – Extensions General Settings Section55'''
 
 
'''Figure 33 – Extensions Forward Settings Section57'''
 
 
'''Figure 34 – Extensions Advanced Network Settings Page60'''
 
 
'''Figure 35 – Extensions Voicemail Settings Section63'''
 
 
'''Figure 36 – Extensions CODECS Settings Page66'''
 
 
'''Figure 37 – Extensions Calling Permissions Section67'''
 
 
'''Figure 38 – Extensions Advanced Settings Follow Me Setup Page69'''
 
 
'''Figure 39 – Extensions Auto-Discovery Tab71'''
 
 
'''Figure 40 – Auto-Discovery Device Color Legend72'''
 
 
'''Figure 41 – Auto- Discovery Device Values73'''
 
 
'''Figure 42 – Auto-Discovery Edit Selected Functions74'''
 
 
'''Figure 43 – Auto-Discovery View Settings Page75'''
 
 
'''Figure 44 – Auto-Discovery Advanced Filter Settings76'''
 
 
'''Figure 45 – Auto-Discovery Advanced Scan Settings Page77'''
 
 
'''Figure 46 – Auto-Discovery Command Functions Page78'''
 
 
'''Figure 47 – Extension Listing80'''
 
 
'''Figure 48 – Edit Phone Key Settings Page81'''
 
 
'''Figure 49 – Edit Phone Audio Settings Page82'''
 
 
'''Figure 50 - Edit Phone SIP/Network Settings Page83'''
 
 
'''Figure 51 - Edit Phone Display Settings Page84'''
 
 
'''Figure 52 – Edit Phone Expansion Module Settings Page85'''
 
 
'''Figure 53 – Ring Groups Page87'''
 
 
'''Figure 54 – Edit Ring Group Page89'''
 
 
'''Figure 55 – Advanced Ring Group and Custom Caller ID Settings Section92'''
 
 
'''Figure 56 – Edit Members/Agents Section94'''
 
 
'''Figure 57 – ACD Edit Agents Page99'''
 
 
'''Figure 58 – Multicast Paging Groups Page101'''
 
 
'''Figure 59 – Edit Page Group Window101'''
 
 
'''Figure 60 – Ring Group Live Queue Data104'''
 
 
'''Figure 61 – Menus Page107'''
 
 
'''Figure 62 – Edit Menus Page (with Control Menu Prompts open)108'''
 
 
'''Figure 63 – Advanced Menu Settings Page111'''
 
 
'''Figure 64 – Remote Menu Announcement DTMF Admin Flow112'''
 
 
'''Figure 65 – Conferences Page113'''
 
 
'''Figure 66 - Edit Conference113'''
 
 
'''Figure 67 – Features Code Page115'''
 
 
'''Figure 68 – Edit Voicemail Box Settings Page116'''
 
 
'''Figure 69 – Notification Settings / Voicemail Box Page122'''
 
 
'''Figure 70 – Edit Schedule and Holidays Page124'''
 
 
'''Figure 71 – Sample Branch Office Networking127'''
 
 
'''Figure 72 – Edit Branch Office Page128'''
 
 
'''Figure 73 – Branch Offices Page130'''
 
 
'''Figure 74 – Branch Office Extension Section133'''
 
 
'''Figure 75 – Show Extensions Page134'''
 
 
'''Figure 76 – Incoming Call Routing Page135'''
 
 
'''Figure 77 – Incoming Routing Edit Incoming DID CID Page138'''
 
 
'''Figure 78 – Outgoing Routing Page140'''
 
 
'''Figure 79 – Add New Outgoing Route Page141'''
 
 
'''Figure 80 - Class of Service145'''
 
 
'''Figure 81 – Blocking Dialing 1-900146'''
 
 
'''Figure 82 – Least Cost Routing Example147'''
 
 
'''Figure 83 – Information (411) Subroute Setting148'''
 
 
'''Figure 84 – PBX Admin Settings Section149'''
 
 
'''Figure 85 – PBX General Settings Section150'''
 
 
'''Figure 86 – PBX Security Log Watch and Ban Service Status153'''
 
 
'''Figure 87 – Security Log Watch and Ban Security Settings153'''
 
 
'''Figure 88 – PBX Time Settings Section155'''
 
 
'''Figure 89 – Outbound Transfer Numbers Section157'''
 
 
'''Figure 90 – InGenius Connector Settings Section158'''
 
 
'''Figure 91 – Create Backup Section159'''
 
 
'''Figure 92 – PBX Database Automatic Backups Section160'''
 
 
'''Figure 93 – PBX Database Upload Backup File Section161'''
 
 
'''Figure 94 – Backup Date/Time Information163'''
 
 
'''Figure 95 – PBX Voicemail General Settings Section164'''
 
 
'''Figure 96 – PBX Voicemail Menu Section165'''
 
 
'''Figure 97 – PBX Voicemail Settings Section167'''
 
 
'''Figure 98 – PBX Voicemail Archive Section169'''
 
 
'''Figure 99 – PBX Voicemail Listing Page171'''
 
 
'''Figure 100 – SIP Networking Settings Page172'''
 
 
'''Figure 101 – SIP Advanced Settings Page177'''
 
 
'''Figure 102 – Phone Global Page181'''
 
 
'''Figure 103 – Upload Voice Prompt Section183'''
 
 
'''Figure 104 – Record New Voice Prompt Section183'''
 
 
'''Figure 105 – Prompt Files on the Server Section185'''
 
 
'''Figure 106 – System Default Music on Hold Section186'''
 
 
'''Figure 107 – Create a Playlist Section187'''
 
 
'''Figure 108 – Music on Hold Playlist188'''
 
 
'''Figure 109 – Features Code Speed Dialing Section189'''
 
 
'''Figure 110 – Services System Information Page191'''
 
 
'''Figure 111 – Services Download License Information Section192'''
 
 
'''Figure 112 – Services Assign Licenses Page194'''
 
 
'''Figure 113 – Services System Functions Section195'''
 
 
'''Figure 114 - Services Load File System Section197'''
 
 
'''Figure 115 – Services TFTP Files Section198'''
 
 
'''Figure 116 – Services Log File Settings Section199'''
 
 
'''Figure 117 – Services Logging Level Section200'''
 
 
'''Figure 118 – Services Call Event Log Section201'''
 
 
'''Figure 119 – Services Automated Phone Firmware Updates202'''
 
 
'''Figure 120 - Scheduled Calling203'''
 
 
'''Figure 121 - List of Scheduled Calls203'''
 
 
'''Figure 122 - Edit Scheduled Call205'''
 
 
'''Figure 123 - Recurrence206'''
 
 
'''Figure 124 – CDR Reports Page208'''
 
 
'''Figure 125 – Queue Graphs Page212'''
 
 
'''Figure 126 – Reports Queue Graph Overview Tab213'''
 
 
'''Figure 127 – Reports Queue Graphs Agents Tab214'''
 
 
'''Figure 128 – Reports Queue Graphs Tab215'''
 
 
'''Figure 129 – Reports Queue Graphs Logs Tab215'''
 
 
'''Figure 130 – System Diagnostics Page216'''
 
 
'''Figure 131 – Monitoring Page217'''
 
 
'''Figure 132 – Edit Phone Settings Page236'''
 
 
'''Figure 133 – Aastra Advanced Phone Settings Page241'''
 
 
'''LIST OF TABLES'''
 
 
'''Table 1 – IP PBX Features4'''
 
 
'''Table 2 – Setup Worksheet Descriptions12'''
 
 
'''Table 3 – Sample Exported .CSV Worksheet12'''
 
 
'''Table 4 – Feature and Link Descriptions18'''
 
 
'''Table 5 – Navigational Buttons and Links19'''
 
 
'''Table 6 – Network Setting Descriptions22'''
 
 
'''Table 7 – Network Features and Descriptions23'''
 
 
'''Table 8 – Web Server Features and Descriptions24'''
 
 
'''Table 9 – Access Control List Definitions29'''
 
 
'''Table 10 – Add New Service Settings and Descriptions30'''
 
 
'''Table 11 – Add New Rule Settings and Descriptions30'''
 
 
'''Table 12 – Hardware Trunk Provider Settings and Descriptions34'''
 
 
'''Table 13 – Hardware Provider Configuration Settings and Descriptions38'''
 
 
'''Table 14 – SIP Provider Configuration Settings and Descriptions44'''
 
 
'''Table 15 – Create Extension Fields and Descriptions50'''
 
 
'''Table 16 – Search Extension Parameters and Description51'''
 
 
'''Table 17 – General Extension Settings and Descriptions56'''
 
 
'''Table 18 – Extension Forward Settings and Descriptions57'''
 
 
'''Table 19 – Extensions Advanced Networking Settings and Descriptions62'''
 
 
'''Table 20 – Voice Mail Settings and Descriptions65'''
 
 
'''Table 21 – Extensions CODECS Settings and Recommendations66'''
 
 
'''Table 22 – Calling Permission Settings and Descriptions68'''
 
 
'''Table 23 – Extensions Follow Me Settings and Descriptions70'''
 
 
'''Table 24 – Auto-Discovery Scan Details73'''
 
 
'''Table 25 – Auto-Discovery Edit Selected Tab Functions and Descriptions74'''
 
 
'''Table 26 – Auto-Discovery Functions and Descriptions76'''
 
 
'''Table 27 – Advanced Filter Settings and Descriptions77'''
 
 
'''Table 28 – Auto-Discovery Advanced Scan Settings and Descriptions78'''
 
 
'''Table 29 – Auto-Discovery Command Settings and Descriptions78'''
 
 
'''Table 30 – Edit Key Settings and Descriptions81'''
 
 
'''Table 31 - Edit Phone Audio Settings and Descriptions83'''
 
 
'''Table 32 – Edit Phone SIP/Network Settings and Descriptions84'''
 
 
'''Table 33 – Edit Phone Display Settings and Descriptions85'''
 
 
'''Table 34 – Edit Phone Expansion Module Settings and Descriptions86'''
 
 
'''Table 35 – Edit Ring Group Settings and Descriptions90'''
 
 
'''Table 36 – Advanced Ring Group and Custom Caller ID Settings and Descriptions92'''
 
 
'''Table 37 – Edit Members/Agents Settings and Descriptions94'''
 
 
'''Table 38 – Automatic Call Distribution (Agents) Page96'''
 
 
'''Table 39 – Edit Ring Group ACD Agents Settings and Descriptions98'''
 
 
'''Table 40 – Add/Edit Agent Features and Descriptions99'''
 
 
'''Table 41 – Multicast Paging Settings and Descriptions102'''
 
 
'''Table 42 – Live Queue Fields and Descriptions105'''
 
 
'''Table 43 – Add/Edit Settings and Descriptions109'''
 
 
'''Table 44 – Advanced Settings and Description111'''
 
 
'''Table 45 – Conference Settings and Descriptions114'''
 
 
'''Table 46 – Features Code Settings and Descriptions115'''
 
 
'''Table 47 - Voice Mailbox Settings and Descriptions118'''
 
 
'''Table 48 – Notification and Voicemail Box Settings and Descriptions123'''
 
 
'''Table 49 – Edit Schedule Settings and Descriptions125'''
 
 
'''Table 50 – Branch Office Settings and Descriptions129'''
 
 
'''Table 51 – Incoming Call Routing Settings and Descriptions136'''
 
 
'''Table 52 - Outbound Routing Page Descriptions139'''
 
 
'''Table 53 – Outbound Route Settings and Descriptions143'''
 
 
'''Table 54 – Block 1900 Outbound Call Configuration147'''
 
 
'''Table 55 – Least Cost Outbound Call Subroute Configuration148'''
 
 
'''Table 56 – Information (411) Subroute Configuration149'''
 
 
'''Table 57 – PBX Admin Settings Parameters and Descriptions150'''
 
 
'''Table 58 – General PBX Admin Settings and Descriptions151'''
 
 
'''Table 59 – PBX Security Log Watch/Ban Settings and Descriptions154'''
 
 
'''Table 60 – PBX Time Settings and Descriptions155'''
 
 
'''Table 61 – Create Backup Settings and Descriptions159'''
 
 
'''Table 62 – PBX Database Automatic Backup Settings and Descriptions161'''
 
 
'''Table 63 - Saved Backups162'''
 
 
'''Table 64 – PBX General Settings and Descriptions165'''
 
 
'''Table 65 – PBX Voicemail Menu Setting and Descriptions166'''
 
 
'''Table 66 – PBX Voicemail Settings and Descriptions168'''
 
 
'''Table 67 – PBX Voicemail Archive Settings and Descriptions169'''
 
 
'''Table 68 – SIP Networking Settings and Descriptions173'''
 
 
'''Table 69 – SIP Advanced Settings and Descriptions180'''
 
 
'''Table 70 - Phone Global Settings and Descriptions182'''
 
 
'''Table 71 – Features Code Settings and Descriptions189'''
 
 
'''Table 72 – Services System Settings and Descriptions192'''
 
 
'''Table 73 - License Info Descriptions193'''
 
 
'''Table 74 – Services System Functions and Descriptions196'''
 
 
'''Table 75 – Services Log File Settings and Descriptions199'''
 
 
'''Table 76 – Services Logging Levels and Descriptions200'''
 
 
'''Table 77 – Services Call Event Logging and Descriptions201'''
 
 
'''Table 78 – Services Automated Firmware Parameters and Descriptions202'''
 
 
'''Table 79 - Scheduled Call List Descriptions204'''
 
 
'''Table 80 - Edit Scheduled Call Descriptions205'''
 
 
'''Table 81 - Recurrence Descriptions206'''
 
 
'''Table 82 - CDR Report Descriptions209'''
 
 
'''Table 83 – Queue Graphs Search Parameters212'''
 
 
'''Table 84 – Edit Phone Settings and Descriptions237'''
 
 
'''Table 85 – Edit Advanced Phone Settings – IPitomy Phones238'''
 
 
'''Table 86 – Edit Advanced Phone Settings for IPitomy Phones240'''
 
 
'''Table 87 – Aastra Advanced Phone Settings and Descriptions242'''
 
 
 
'''''Introduction'''''
 
 
== About the IPitomy IP PBX ==
 
The IPitomy IP PBX is a powerful business communications platform. It is a pure IP PBX designed to use IP networks for voice calls. Engineered to support from 10 to 500 users, the system will work with analog lines and T1 /PRI lines for traditional Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) connectivity. In addition to traditional telephone lines, the IPitomy IP PBX can use VoIP SIP Trunks, replacing traditional PSTN lines with a broadband telephone service.
 
 
=== Benefits of VoIP Technology ===
 
The IPitomy IP PBX can support any or all of these connectivity methods simultaneously or in any combination. Customers not quite ready to depend on VoIP providers for all of their business communications can start at their own pace and gain a comfort level, shifting to VoIP broadband providers at their own pace.
 
 
Benefits of VoIP technology include:
 
 
* '''One Wiring System'''  The system uses a single wiring system for telephones and dataall data and voice are on Local Area Network (LAN) Category 5 wiring.
 
* '''Web-based Administration'''  System administration is performed on the network through a Web-based administration program. The Web-Based Administration can be used locally or remotely from anywhere.
 
* '''Remote Users'''  When calls are routed over the Internet, long distance charges can be avoided. In businesses with remote workers, these employees can stay logged into the office through a broadband connection at all times without incurring any additional charges. Remote users have all of the features of the local users. Remote users can be included in any ring groups, ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Queues and other call routing schemes.
 
* '''Centralized System Features'''  Every extension that is logged into the system is capable of receiving and originating calls. The use of system features such as voicemail, automated attendant and email are all centralized simplifying all support and maintenance.
 
* '''Reduced Costs'''  VoIP system users can reduce cost in many areas of a business. VoIP telephony lowers the cost of support and maintenance costs, as well as, reducing telephony line costs by up to 50%.
 
* '''Simplifies Administration'''  Moves, additions and changes are simple. The IPitomy IP PBX provides enhanced capabilities for users to make changes without incurring a service call.
 
* '''Investment Protection'''  VoIP, and in particular, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)-based VoIP products offer investment protection. The industry is rapidly moving toward Internet Protocol (IP) communications technologies. Older digital and analog technologies are becoming obsolete and are being replaced with IP-based products that will be around for a long time.
 
 
== IPitomy IP PBX Features ==
 
Understanding the IPitomy IP PBX’s architecture and how it works will make installing the system simple.
 
 
The IPitomy IP PBX is an all-in-one business communications system. This powerful system includes a complete suite of business communication applications in one appliance:
 
 
* Fully-featured Business Phone System
 
* Automated Attendant and Interactive Voice Response (IVR)
 
* Enhanced Call Distribution
 
* Enhanced Voice Messaging System with Unified Messaging
 
* Meet-me Conference Application
 
* Built-in Music on Hold
 
* Call Queuing for Inbound Calls
 
* Find Me/Follow Me
 
* Remote Extensions
 
* Browser-based Administration
 
* Branch Offices
 
* Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
 
 
<center>'''Figure 1 – IPitomy IP PBX Systems and HD Phones'''</center>
 
 
The IPitomy IP PBX’s administration menus are a series of Web pages accessible from a Web browser. To the left of the Menu is a navigation bar that allows users to click on and administer each section of the system. Administration of the IPitomy IP PBX is simple and intuitive. The system is designed with six primary areas of functionality:
 
 
* '''System'''  System setup consists of network configuration settings.
 
* '''Providers'''  Providers are sources of PSTN and VoIP connectivity. Providers are the lines that handle all incoming and outgoing calls. All VoIP and traditional telephone providers are setup here. DID numbers are also entered here.
 
* '''Destinations'''  Destinations are places where calls are routed in the system: extensions, groups of extensions, automated attendants, conferences, and voicemail.
 
* '''Call Routing'''  These settings route inbound calls to specific destinations within the system, and send outbound calls over specific local, long distance, international, and emergency routes.
 
* '''PBX Setup'''  These settings globally configure PBX timers, voice messaging, and other system features.
 
* '''Reporting'''  These reports display system usage, monitor activity, and provide diagnostic information.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Feature'''</center>
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Extensions =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Extensions are telephones. A telephone can be an IP (SIP) telephone or a Softphone. Calls are routed to an extension where people answer them. In the IPitomy IP PBX, an extension can be located in an office or outside the office where a broadband connection is used.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Groups =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Groups are a set of extensions. Once a group is created, extensions can be designated as members of the group. This is accomplished by selecting group members from a drop- down list. Calls can be routed to groups via inbound routing.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Menus (Automated Attendant) =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| To create an automated attendant use the system’s Menus feature. The Menus feature allows you to route calls to a destination in the system like a group, extension or another menu.
 
 
Call Destinations are selected from a drop-down list for each corresponding key-pad digit a caller must select to get to their chosen destination. A Menu must have a Menu Prompt. This is a recording that identifies for callers the destinations they may choose. For example, a Menu Prompt might offer callers the option to press “1” for Sales, “2” for Accounts Receivable or other digits for another department.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== DTMF Menu Administration =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| New in version: 3.4.1 is DTMF Menu Administration. This feature allows the user to administer the Menu (Auto Attendant) remotely using just a telephone (with DTMF dial capability).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Advanced Routing Functions =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| When building an automated attendant (Menus) all routable destinations in the system will appear in the drop-down list. In addition to the destinations that are created while configuring the system, there are several advanced functions that can be used from the drop-down list.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Voicemail and Unified Messaging =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| When an extension is created, a voicemail box for that extension is also created. A voicemail box allows a caller to leave a message if a person is not available at the extension. When dialing into a mailbox for the first time, a user should record their name and a mailbox greeting. The name is used in the company’s dial-by-name directory when selected from the auto attendant (Menus). The greeting is played when they are not available to take a call and a caller reaches their mailbox.
 
 
If an email address is included in the Extension page, you can configure Unified Messaging and a copy of the voicemail message will be emailed as a .Wav file to the users email account. This message can then be listened to on a PC.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Directory =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The system has a dial-by-name directory. This option may be part of the automated-attendant. When this option is selected, a caller dials the first three letters of the last / first name of the party they would like to reach. Names that match these three letters are played and the caller selects the extension to which they want to be transferred. Names are stated in the directory as they have been recorded by users in their voicemail box, and spelt out if they have not recorded their name.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Numbers =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| A Direct Inward Dialed (DID) number is a telephone number assigned by a service provider (i.e., T1 line, PRI or VoIP). DIDs allow direct routing of a call to a destination within the system. You can route to any destination available on the PBX.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Conferencing (Meet Me) =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| A Meet-me Conference is an extension on the system used for conference calls. Participants can access a conference by dialing the designated Meet-me Conference extension. Routing callers to a Meet-me Conference can be accomplished by using a DID, a menu, or simply transferring callers to the conference extension.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== FollowMe =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This feature allows the PBX to try and find users who are not at their desk. It can be configured to call their cell phones, house phones, or other extensions in the PBX. Once answered, the user can accept the call, or refuse it. Unhandled calls return to the PBX to leave a message at the original extension’s voicemail.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Forwarding Gateway =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Mobility has become a part of everyday life for most people. System users need to be able to take calls anywhere. The IPitomy IP PBX has the ability to forward calls. Users can turn call forwarding “'''on'''” and “'''off'''” while in the office or away from the office by using a touch-tone key pad. This is set up in the edit Extensions page, but can be modified from any phone, including a cell phone. Modifying forward settings remotely requires the automated attendant (Menus) option to be programmed.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Cascading Message Notification =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This feature works using the same methods as FollowMe, but pertains to voicemail messages. When configured, if an extension gets a new voicemail, you will be able to send the voicemail message to a variety of numbers (Destinations), define the order in which to send the message and can be set to make the system to notify you that a new message was received. Additionally, you can add or remove extensions to the list of recipients when a broadcast message is sent.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Voicemail Gateway =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Using either a Menu or a DID, users can call in from any telephone and check messages. The voicemail gateway allows users to dial a pre-defined digit from a touch- tone key pad on any phone to retrieve their messages.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Branch Offices =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Branch offices can be created to allow multiple PBXs to route calls to each other. Branch office extensions can be transferred to, placed in ring groups, or selected as menu destinations.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 1 – IP PBX Features'''</center>
 
 
 
'''''Getting Started'''''
 
 
'''''Boot Up – Safe Power Down'''''
 
 
Each IPitomy IP PBX is equipped with a Boot Up/Safe Power Down momentary button/switch at the front of the chassis. This switch is a primary element of controlling not only the hardware but the Operating System (OS) and PBX software. If it becomes necessary to use this button/switch – especially when powering down – it is imperative that you read and understand the functionality of this switch.
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#ffff00;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="background-color:#ffff00;border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT:'''
 
 
<tt>'''Use of this switch/button is very convenient and VERY specific.'''</tt>
 
 
'''Improper use can cause very undesirable results.'''
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Use this button/switch by pressing and releasing immediately.'''</center>
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>Legacy 1100</center>
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>Legacy1200</center>
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>PBX+ (1100/1200)</center>
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>2000/5000</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center> Behind Drive Access Door</center>
 
 
|}
 
The button/switch has three functions:
 
 
'''(Use 1 & 2 only – unless directed to use the 3<sup>rd</sup> function by a technical support representative). Repeatedly turning off the power with a hard boot can damage (corrupt) the data on the hard drive. In some instances, this can void the warranty.'''
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>Use</center>
 
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Condition'''</center>
 
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Operation'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="background-color:#e5e5e5;border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>1.</center>
 
| style="background-color:#e5e5e5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| While the PBX is '''not''' operating… (power cord connected but not yet powered up OR previously, properly powered down)
 
| style="background-color:#e5e5e5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Press and release the button/switch to start PBX operation
 
 
|-
 
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
 
|-
 
| style="background-color:#e5e5e5;border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>2.</center>
 
| style="background-color:#e5e5e5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| While the PBX '''is''' operating…
 
 
Shut down can take as long as 5 minutes. '''Please be patient.'''
 
| style="background-color:#e5e5e5;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Press AND '''Release''' the button/switch to initiate the safe power-down sequence. The PBX will shut-down all applications running in the proper sequence – ensuring that no damage occurs to the database and applications during shut-down.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
 
|-
 
| style="background-color:#c00000;border:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>3.</center>
 
| style="background-color:#c00000;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| While the '''PBX''' is '''NON-Responsive''' and all other methods to regain control of the OS and applications have failed.
 
| style="background-color:#c00000;border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Press AND '''Hold''' the button/switch to FORCE immediate shut-down.
 
 
This is '''NOT recommended''' and should be avoided.
 
 
|}
 
'''''Connecting the System'''''
 
 
'''Hardware Setup'''
 
 
The IPitomy IP PBX comes assembled and ready to install. The system requires some form of trunking, be it a connection to the PSTN for analog or T1 lines or a SIP trunk. It requires telephones to be connected to the local area network (LAN). Broadband access must be established for VoIP connectivity (allowing remote extensions , branch offices, remote management, and SIP trunks).
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 2 – Hardware Setup Diagram'''</center>
 
 
 
'''Connecting the Phone Lines'''
 
 
The IPitomy IP PBX is equipped to support analog, digital, gateway or SIP connections. Analog lines or a T1/PRI are connected with internal hardware resources. A gateway connects analog telephone lines by registering itself as a SIP provider over the LAN. SIP providers create a direct connection to the system.
 
 
==== INTERNAL ANALOG LINE CARDS ====
 
The IPitomy IP PBX uses three basic analog devices for PSTN connectivity.
 
 
'''''Digium TDM04B Analog Line Card (4 PSTN line connections'')  '''This analog line card supporting these connections is already installed and completely configured. Simply connect the phone lines to the RJ11 jacks at the rear of the IPitomy IP PBX and start making calls.
 
 
'''''Digium TDM808B Analog Line Card (8 PSTN line connections'')'''  This analog line card supporting these connections is already installed and completely configured. Simply connect the phone lines to the RJ11 jacks at the rear of the IPitomy IP PBX and start making calls.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: The 4 and 8 PSTN line connections are a single pair, one line per jack. It may be necessary to echo tune the system. Please contact an IPitomy Technical Support personnel if you notice an echo on the line.'''
 
 
|}
 
'''''Digium 2404B 16 and 2406B 24 Analog Line Cards (16 or 24 PSTN line connections)''' '' These lines are plugged into an Amphenol connector and need to be terminated in a cross connect, break-out box or patch panel. The Amphenol connector uses a single pair connection to each phone line.
 
 
 
<center>'''(Diagram''' '''4)'''</center>
 
 
 
=== INTERNAL DIGITAL T1 CARDS ===
 
The IPitomy IP PBX uses two devises for digital connectivity.
 
 
'''''Digium TE122P T1 Card (a single T1/E1/J1 connection) ''''' This card supports industry standard telephony and data protocols, including both RBS and Primary Rate ISDN (PRI) protocol families for voice traffic. The card has a default configuration for the system, but this configuration may be adjusted based on preference. Plug the RJ45 connector into the T1 TDM source supplied by the T1 provider.
 
 
'''''Digium TE205P T1 Card (a dual T1/E1/J1 connection)'''''  This card supports industry standard telephony and data protocols, including both RBS and Primary Rate ISDN (PRI) protocol families for voice traffic. The card has a default configuration for the system, but this configuration may be adjusted based on preference. Plug up to two RJ45 connectors into the T1 TDM sources supplied by the T1 provider.
 
 
 
<center>('''Diagram 5)'''</center>
 
 
=== Connecting Using an External Gateway ===
 
Gateways connect legacy phone equipment (PBXs, ACDs, voicemail systems, etc.) to modern VoIP systems and services. IPitomy supports many different communications protocols from both the modern world of VoIP and from the legacy PSTN. This makes it a powerful tool for building gateways and protocol converters.
 
 
PSTN lines can be connected to a Gateway device. The gateway device is connected to the LAN. The Gateway is then registered as a SIP provider in the system.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 3 – External Gateway Connection Diagram'''</center>
 
 
 
=== Connecting to a LAN ===
 
In order to be able to connect all of the devices (PCs, Phones, Gateways, etc) to their Local Area Network (LAN) you will most likely need to install at least one Switch.
 
 
 
=== Connecting Using SIP Providers ===
 
Once connected to the LAN, the LAN's broadband connection provides a pathway for SIP VoIP Providers. Use the SIP Provider pages to setup a connection.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 4 – SIP Provider Connection Diagram'''</center>
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 5 – LAN Connection Diagram'''</center>
 
 
 
=== Connecting Telephones ===
 
The following diagrams indicate the port locations on the IP120 and IP1500.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 6 – IP120 and IP1500 Connector Ports'''</center>
 
 
 
'''''DATA and network CONFIGURATION'''''
 
 
Planning before getting started will make the setup and installation of the IPitomy IP PBX simple. IPitomy has created the '''IPitomy Setup Worksheet''' to assist in recording business and system information used in planning system setup and installation. This Checklist can be downloaded from IPitomy.com in the Dealer Section of the Website.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Please contact your IPitomy Sales Representative to obtain a login information for the Dealer site at (941) 306-2200.'''
 
 
|}
 
'''''Setup Worksheet'''''
 
 
The '''Setup Worksheet''' is broken out into sections where required data can be entered. Once all the information in the setup worksheet is populated, it can then be imported to the IPitomy system. This will save a great amount a setup/configuration time.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT:''' '''To take full advantage of the functionality in the setup worksheet, you will need to make sure that your Excel macro security is set to Medium or lower (you will need to restart Excel after changing these settings). I'''
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Figure 7 – Sample Setup Worksheet'''</center>
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Data Type'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description/Recommended Settings'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Network Information'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| You will need to know some basic information on the target network. Use this page to store all pertinent information regarding the sites LAN and WAN connection.
 
 
* The type of data facilities you will be using for access to the Internet will dictate how much bandwidth is available for phone calls.
 
* If you are going to use remote phones, SIP providers, or Branch Offices, you will need to have a fixed IP address.
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''User Data'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Use this page to gather and store information for the extensions and stand alone mailboxes on the PBX. This page allows you to export the extension information to another worksheet. Save this worksheet as a .csv file and you can import it directly into the PBX, saving you time.
 
 
* '''Extension Numbers – '''required
 
* '''Name – '''required
 
* '''Email Address - '''required if the end user desires to use Unified Messaging
 
* '''Device –''' setting this in the worksheet will make your installation much easier when using autoprovisioning and IP550/IP120 phones
 
* '''MAC Address –''' for the most part this field can be left blank. If using Aastra phones, it may be more useful.
 
 
Voice mail only boxes may be created as well. You can print out a copy of this sheet and ask your customer to fill it in or provide them the spreadsheet to fill out.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Groups'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Use this page to gather and store information about ring groups. This will allow you to build the groups in the PBX much quicker at the time of install because everything has already been decided upon in advance.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Menus'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Building menus in the PBX will be much easier once you have completed the sections pertaining to Menus. In addition to the setting in the PBX, you will be able to have the end user write out the prompt scripts, ensuring that the key press destinations match the dialogue the callers will hear.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Unified Messaging'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Unified Messaging allows the PBX to send your voicemail messages directly to your email inbox. Use this section to log the end users email server information.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Telephone Lines'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If you know the telephone numbers for your telephone lines, it is good to have them all documented ahead of time. You may want to route calls based on a particular number or specific DID.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Music On Hold'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| When a caller is place on hold, park, or is in Queue for a group of extensions, music may be played for them while they wait. The music on hold files can be uploaded to the system from your browser. The music on hold files need to be in MP3 format for IP1100+ systems, and 8bit 8Khz mono .wav file for the IP1000.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Licensing'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Most IPitomy systems come default with a license for 16 users/extensions. To activate the initial license, you must have a connection to the internet and a license key will be uploaded to the system. This is a security feature that protects the user for warranty coverage as well as against unauthorized use. Filling out the User Data page will automatically tell you how many extensions the system needs, at a minimum, to handle the desired users.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Branch Office'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This page will allow you to more accurately plan out an install that will have multiple sites connected via Branch Office. Using unique numbering for each PBX will allow for easier calling between sites.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The lightning bolt, found on the User Data section of the Setup Worksheet, accesses a macro that allows you to export the User Data information pertaining to extension to another worksheet. Once exported, you can save that worksheet as a .csv file, and then load it directly into the PBX.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 2 – Setup Worksheet Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
<center>'''Table 3 – Sample Exported .CSV Worksheet'''</center>
 
 
 
=== CSV Upload ===
 
Once all the extension information has been exported to a .CSV file, you can import that file into the PBX.
 
 
'''STEPS:'''
 
 
# Navigate in the PBX to '''Destinations Extensions. '''The '''Extensions''' page appears.
 
# Select the '''BROWSE''' button at the top of the page. The '''File Upload''' window appears. Locate and select the file that you want to import then click the '''OPEN''' button.
 
 
<center>'''Figure 8 – View of Upload Location Window'''</center>
 
 
 
# The '''CSV File''' field is updated with the source directory information for the file to be imported.
 
 
# Click the '''IMPORT''' button. The '''Create Extensions''' page appears displaying the information that is going to be imported.
 
# Review the information then select the '''CREATE''' button when you are done.
 
 
<center>'''Figure 9 – Create Extension Results Page'''</center>
 
 
 
# The '''Create Extensions''' page will display the results of your import for each extension. You should see a “'''SUCCESS'''” message.
 
# Click on the '''Return to Extensions''' link that appears on the page. This brings you back to the Create Extensions page. Review the Extensions List and find the extension (s) you just created.
 
# Click on the '''Apply Changes''' link at the top of the page to make these changes live on the PBX. A message “Settings Applied” will appear.
 
# You are now ready to update the various settings for the new extension. (''See the '''Destination''' '''Extensions''' section of this user guide for more details on Extensions)''.
 
 
== Network Requirements ==
 
Making preparations for the network in advance will assure there are no surprises. If you are going to have remote extensions, you will need access to the router to setup a network address translation (NAT) and port forwarding.
 
 
A LAN with a broadband connection is required for operation of the system. It must be on a fast Ethernet (100baseT or better). The system must also use Ethernet data switches. The router can use DHCP or not, depending on preference. The IPitomy IP PBX requires a fixed IP on the router subnet. Several ports may need to be forwarded. Make sure your router has TCP/IP port range forwarding by checking the box or product guide. The router should have a fixed IP address with a public IP.
 
 
Pre-existing TFTP servers or DHCP servers broadcasting TFTP servers may cause conflicts for phone configuration. If you have a pre-existing TFTP server being broadcast by your DHCP server, please contact IPitomy support to determine the best solution.
 
 
 
== Port Forwarding ==
 
The following table outlines the port forwarding information in the router that maps public IP addresses to internal IP addresses. Port forwarding must be configured to utilize features such as remote phones, SIP Providers, remote administration and branch office. IPitomy port forwarding requirements are specified below.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 10 – Port Forwarding Configuration Table'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Please contact an IPitomy Technical Support Representative for assistance or additional information regarding how to configure port forwarding for the IP PBX system.'''
 
 
|}
 
== IP Addresses ==
 
To determine the IP address that can be used on the network, check the router or get this information from the Network Administrator. In many cases, this default IP address will be acceptable without any router configuration other than port forwarding (required for remote administration and remote telephones).
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: The IP PBX is required to have a fixed (static) IP address. The system comes with a default static IP address of 192.168.1.249/ippbx.'''
 
 
'''We recommend that you use this default IP address. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group if you need further assistance by email at [mailto:support@ipitomy.com support@ipitomy.com] or phone 941-306-2200 option2, or visit our FAQ page at our website at [http://www.ipitomy.com/ w][http://www.ipitomy.com/ ww.ipitomy.com].'''
 
 
|}
 
=== Changing the IP Address ===
 
If the default IP address does not match the network schema for your install, the PBX has a simple method for changing this information. The Network Console allows you to view and change settings without requiring an external web browser or any network connection.
 
 
'''STEPS:'''
 
 
# Plug a keyboard and monitor into the IP PBX.
 
# From this keyboard, press CTRL-ALT-F7
 
# Follow the instructions displayed on the page to configure the IPs for the PBX. The options used are as follows.
 
 
*
 
**
 
*** '''1''': Network Type – Static or DHCP
 
*** '''2''': IP address
 
*** '''3''': Subnet Mask
 
*** '''4''': Default Gateway
 
*** '''5''': Static DNS
 
*** '''6''': Static DNS 2
 
*** '''7''': Static DNS 3
 
*** '''R''': Refresh View
 
*** '''D''': Default Settings
 
*** '''S''': Save & Update
 
 
# Once''' all values have been configured to match the install network, choose S to save and update'''.
 
 
'''Note:''''' For further details on using the '''Net Console''', please refer to '''Appendix 6.'''''
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 11 – Typical Network Configuration Diagram'''</center>
 
 
 
== Service Providers ==
 
In order to provision the IPitomy IP PBX it is necessary to know the type of Service Providers being used. Carrier and SIP are the most common service providers. Carriers provide plain old telephone lines (POTS), T1s and PRI lines. SIP Providers route voice calls over the internet. This is called voice over internet protocol or VoIP. As part of the installation it will be important to know the:
 
 
* Name of Providers
 
* Type of Service Provided (i.e., POTS, T1,or SIP)
 
* Phone Numbers Associated with the Service
 
* Password and Login Information for SIP Service
 
 
''You should always consider any previous historical data that you have from your existing system. Any past reports or spreadsheets which relate to the components being designed, should be considered as possible input when configuring your IP PBX system. We recommended that you record this information on the '''IPitomy Setup Worksheet.'''''
 
 
 
'''''System Administration'''''
 
 
== Administration Menu ==
 
IPitomy IP PBX’s online administration makes it simple to meet the demands of a frequently changing business. It is also designed to be quick to setup and install. The '''Administration Menu''' is located in the '''Navigation Bar''' to the left of the page.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 12 – Administration Menu Options'''</center>
 
 
 
== IP PBX Administration Options ==
 
This menu contains the administration pages used to configure the system. The Administration Menu is divided into six sections. To navigate to an '''Administration Page''' click on the menu section and page to be changed.
 
 
* '''System'''  System setup consists of network configuration settings.
 
* '''Providers'''  Providers are sources of PSTN and VoIP connectivity. Providers are the lines that handle all incoming and outgoing calls. All VoIP providers will be setup here. DID numbers are also entered here.
 
* '''Destinations'''  Destinations are extensions, groups of extensions, automated attendants (menus), conferences and voicemail. Destinations are places where calls get routed to in the system.
 
* '''Call Routing'''  Routing sends callers to specific inbound destinations within the system, and routing outbound callers over specific outbound routes like local, long distance, international and emergency.
 
* '''PBX Setup'''  System settings allow global configuration settings for system applications like PBX timers, voice messaging settings and music-on-hold.
 
* '''Reporting'''  The system displays usage reports, diagnostic information and monitors system activity.
 
 
=== Administration Page Layout ===
 
<center>'''Figure 13 – Standard Page Layout and Features'''</center>Each online Administration web page contains the standard layout. The following section describes the features or links you will have access to on each page.
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Link'''</center>
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Title Bar'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The Title Bar at the top of each page displays the name of the section of the Administration Menu which is currently being edited.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Default Values'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| When the system is installed it automatically registers default values in many of the administration fields. This simplifies the implementation process.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Advanced''''' '''''Link'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| In several of the online administration features there is an '''Advanced''' link where the '''most sophisticated capabilities of the IPitomy IP PBX''' can be configured. If available (depending on applicable functions), the Advanced link will be located on the lower left side of each page.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''About Us Link'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The About Us link is located at the bottom left corner of each page This link provides additional information about IPitomy.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Contact'' ''Us'' ''Link'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The Contact Us link is located at the bottom left corner of each page. This link will take you to the Contact Us page that provides you with important contact information for IPitomy Communications, LLC. The IPitomy team is never more than a call or email away. To '''contact an IPitomy team member''', click on Contact Us in the lower left corner of the page.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Apply Changes'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''To apply changes to the system you must click the Apply Changes button.''' Located in the top right corner of the page, this link '''globally applies changes''' to the system which is different than the '''Save Changes''' button that only saves changes to the current page.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Logout'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The '''Logout''' link located at the top right corner of the page allows you to logout of the Administration page and takes you back to the IP PBX Admin Login page'''.'''
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 4 – Feature and Link Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
=== Navigational Tools ===
 
The following section describes the navigation tools (buttons) that will allow you to perform various functions such as Add, Delete, Save or Update data within the Administration system. These buttons will appear where the functions are applicable to the type of data being created or modified.
 
 
'''Note:''''' Depending on the page that is being displayed, the buttons/icons may be referred to (labeled) differently. This list describes the more commonly seen and used buttons/icons.''
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Button/Icons'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This button or icon allows you to expand or open the function to view more options.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This button or icon allows you to collapse or close the function.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This button or icon allows you to view the items from a drop down list.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This checkbox button or icon allows you to select or deselect the record for viewing or modifying, as well as to define if certain features are enabled.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This radio button or icon allows you to select or deselect (toggle) between options.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This pencil icon allows you to edit the current settings for a specific record (i.e. extensions or groups).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This pencil with a phone icon allows you to edit an extension’s current phone settings.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This down arrow icon allows you to download a file off of the system.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This “'''X'''” icon allows you to delete the item selected
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This curved arrow icon allows you to restore a file to the system or in some cases, clear out voice messages.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The '''Add''' button allows you to create a new''' destination, provider, route, schedule, '''etc. For example, to add a new extension, click the '''Add''' button on the Extension Administration page. In some cases, the Add button will change (have a different label) depending on the function or page you are viewing or updating. For instance, the button may be displayed as , if you are on the Menus page.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Located in the bottom left corner of the screen, the Save Changes button executes all the changes made to the current page. '''This button must be pressed before leaving a page or changes will be lost'''.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 5 – Navigational Buttons and Links'''</center>
 
 
 
''An easy way to get the information that is required for a specific parameter or field is to mouse over it. A callout box with a description of the requirements or recommended settings will appear.''
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 14 – View of Mouse Over Field Information'''</center>
 
 
=== Login Page ===
 
<center>'''Figure 15 – IP PBX ADMIN Login Page'''</center>
 
 
==== Logging In ====
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From a web browser (ie. Firefox), enter the '''IP Address''' of the System Administration site.
 
# Using the Admin Login (left side), enter the username and password of the PBX. The default login information is:
 
 
'''Username''' = pbxadmin '''Password''' = ipitomy
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group if you need further assistance by email at [mailto:support@ipitomy.com support@ipi][mailto:support@ipitomy.com tomy.com] or phone 941-306-2200 option 2. You can also visit our FAQ page at faq.ipitomy.com.'''
 
 
|}
 
# The '''PBX Administration''' screen appears. Now you can navigate around the PBX, configuring different features as needed.
 
 
==== Logging Out ====
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
* You can logout of the '''PBX Administration''' page at anytime by clicking on the '''Logout''' link located on the top right corner of the screen.
 
* The system logs out and returns you to the '''PBX Administration Login''' page.
 
 
'''''System Networking'''''
 
 
The IPitomy System Menu is for configuring network attributes. For example the IP address of the system and router information. The System Networking Setup Page allows you to define the Internet Setup for the system’s hardware. The system must operate using a static IP address; DHCP should only be used on the IPitomy IP PBX if the router is configured to assign a specific static DHCP address to the system.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 16 – Networking Setup Page'''</center>
 
 
 
The following table describes the fields and recommended settings for Networking Setup for the IP PBX system:
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Field'''</center>
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Recommended Settings'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IP Address'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Use the default address (192.168.1.249)''' of the IPitomy IP PBX or an address outside the range of existing IP addresses assigned by DHCP in the router.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Subnet Mask'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Leave the default setting for the Subnet Mask as (255.255.255.0)'''. The subnet mask defines what traffic the PBX will listen and communicate to. A value of 255 means the octet in question needs to match exactly, while a value of 0 means the octet is not restricted at all. When the PBX is set to the default IP address, a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 tells the system to communicate with any devices in the 192.168.1.xxx range.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Default Gateway'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''The default gateway provided is 192.168.1.1'''. Though this default is a common router IP, every network is different. Enter the IP address of the router handling their Internet connection here.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Static DNS'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Enter the DNS IP address being used on the network'''. If a default DNS IP address is not provided by the router it can be obtained from the network’s Internet Service Provider.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Static DNS2'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Enter the DNS IP address being used on the network'''. If a default DNS IP address is not provided by the router it can be obtained from the network’s Internet Service Provider.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Static DNS3'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Enter the DNS IP address being used on the network'''. If a default DNS IP address is not provided by the router it can be obtained from the network’s Internet Service Provider.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 6 – Network Setting Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
'''''TCP/IP Settings Section'''''
 
 
'''Edit TCP/IP Default Settings'''
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Navigate to '''System Networking'''. The '''TCP/IP Settings''' page appears displaying the default values for the following setting:
 
 
* '''IP Address'''
 
* '''Subnet Mask'''
 
* '''Default Gateway'''
 
* '''Static DNS'''
 
 
# Click on the '''IP Address''' field. Enter the '''IP address''' for the Router. '''Use the default address (192.168.1.249)''' of the IPitomy IP PBX or an address outside the range of existing IP addresses assigned by DHCP in the router Enter the desired IP Address. ''See Table above for recommended settings.''
 
# Click on the '''Subnet Mask '''field. '''Leave the default setting for the Subnet Mask as (255.255.255.0)'''. ''See Table above for recommended settings.''
 
# Click on the '''Default Gateway''' field. Change the default Gateway value to the desired target network. ''See Table above for recommended settings.''
 
# Click on the '''Static DNS''' field. Change the default DNS value to the desired target network. ''See Table above for recommended settings.''
 
# Repeat '''step 5''' to set the remaining DNS values, if necessary.
 
# Click on the button
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
== Access Control (PBX Access) ==
 
The Access Control page is comprised of 3 sub-pages; Host Access, Web Server, and Access Control List. Each is accessible from the buttons at the top of the page and pertains a different method of controlling access to the PBX.
 
 
=== Host Access ===
 
This feature allows you to limit access to special services on the PBX. An “'''allow from'''” entry is a list of one or more host names, host addresses, patterns or wildcards that will be matched against the client host name or address. List elements should be separated by blanks and/or commas.
 
 
 
'''Note:''''' The parameter for the IP PBX Host Access is pre-configured per the manufacturer’s specifications. We recommend that you '''do not change''' this configuration value.''
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 17 – PBX Host Access Page'''</center>
 
 
 
The following table describes the features and functions available on the Host Access page:
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Fields/Buttons'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Delete Selected Items'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This button allows you to delete multiple services at a time.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Load Factory Defaults'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This button will set the PBX back to the default Host Access settings.
 
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Add a New Item'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This section is where you would add new rules for accessing special services on the PBX
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 7 – Network Features and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Changes to the Host Access List are installed immediately. They are database independent so custom changes do not migrate from one box to another via a database backup file.'''
 
 
'''Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group if you think you need to modify these settings. Email via [mailto:support@ipitomy.com support@ipitomy.com] or phone at 941-306-2200 option 2. You can also visit our FAQ page at faq.ipitomy.com.'''
 
 
|}
 
== Web Server Configuration ==
 
This feature allows you to define which IPs and/or domains can access the web server, as well as restart the Web Server. In order for changes to this list to take effect, you must Restart the Web Server.
 
 
''The parameter for the IP PBX Web Server is pre-configured per the manufacturer’s specifications. We recommend that you '''do not change''' this configuration.''
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 18 – Web Server Configuration Page'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Feature'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Restart Web Server'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This feature allows you to restart the web server so that changes made that impact server components can be applied.
 
 
'''Note:''' '''Restarting the server will not interrupt phone service. A reboot of the PBX system will also apply changes made to other attributes.'''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Allow Access From'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Defines the networks and/or domains that are allowed to access the PBX. The “Allow” format may be:
 
 
* '''Domain name'''
 
* '''Full IP address'''
 
* '''Partial IP address'''
 
* '''Network / netmask pair'''
 
* '''Network / CIDR specification'''
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Delete Selected Items'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This button allows you to delete multiple services at a time.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Load Factory Defaults'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This button will set the PBX back to the default Web Server settings.
 
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Add a New Item'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This section is where you would add new rules for accessing the Web Server
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 8 – Web Server Features and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT:''' '''Changes to the Web Server Access List are preconfigured. They are database independent so custom changes do not migrate from one box to another via a database backup file.'''
 
 
'''Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group if you think you need to modify these settings. Email via [mailto:support@ipitomy.com support@ipitomy.com] or phone at 941-306-2200 option 2. You can also visit our FAQ page at faq.ipitomy.com.'''
 
 
|}
 
=== Add New Permission ===
 
'''STEPS:'''
 
 
# Navigate to '''System Access Control'''
 
# Click on the '''Web Server''' button located at the top of the page. The '''Web Server Configuration''' page appears.
 
# In the '''Add a New Item''' section, enter the network or domain you want to allow to access the PBX web server
 
# Click the '''ADD''' button.
 
# The new permission rule will be displayed under Allow Access From window above
 
# Click on the '''Restart Web Server''' button.
 
# Click OK when prompted to confirm you wish to restart the Web Server
 
 
# A “''Please Standby''” message appears. Once the reboot process is completed you will be returned to the '''Web Server Configuration''' page.
 
 
=== Load Factory Default ===
 
This feature allows you to restore the manufacturer’s factory default settings. It will restore the settings to the factory recommended defaults.
 
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Web Server''' page, click '''Load Factory Default''' button. This will return or restores the Allow Access From list back to the manufacturer’s default setting.
 
# Once the changes applied, you will need to restart the web server. Please refer to the ''Restart Web Server'' topic of this user guide for steps on how to restart the server.
 
# Click on the '''Restart Web Server''' button.
 
# Click OK when prompted to confirm you wish to restart the Web Server
 
 
# A “''Please Standby''” message appears. Once the reboot process is completed you will be returned to the '''Web Server Configuration''' page.
 
 
== Access Control List ==
 
The Access Control List defines what networks different PBX features are permitted to communicate with.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 19 – Access Control List - Add New Rule Section'''</center>
 
 
 
The following table outlines the parameters and descriptions for the Access Control List.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Feature'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Service'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Displays the name of configured services. Typical services on the PBX are:
 
 
SIP - Used for Calls
 
 
Call Manager - Used for Desktop Call Manager
 
 
TFTP – Used by phones to pull down config and firmware files
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ports'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Displays the ports that were defined for a particular service.
 
 
SIP – 5060
 
 
Call Manager – 5048
 
 
TFTP - 69
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Rules'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Displays the rules that were configured for a particular service.
 
 
Deny List – Accepts all traffic, unless specifically definedAllow List – Denies all traffic, unless specifically defined
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 9 – Access Control List Definitions'''</center>
 
 
 
=== Load Recommended Default ===
 
This is the recommended method to set the Access Control List to the typically used settings.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Navigate to PBX SetupSIP
 
# Set the LocalNet to match the network the PBX is installed on, Save, and Apply Changes
 
# Navigate to the '''Access Control List''' page, click '''Load Recommended Default''' button. This will create default rules allowing the PBX to communicate to devices on the LocalNet in regards to SIP, Call Manager, and TFTP
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
=== Add New Service ===
 
<center>'''Figure 20 – Access Control List Page - Add New Service Section'''</center>
 
 
 
The following table outlines the parameters and descriptions required for adding a new service.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Feature'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Service Name'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the name of the new service and will populate the Service drop-down list in the Add New Rule section.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Service Transport'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the service type that will be used to transport the message. The options are Both, TCP or UDP'''. '''
 
 
SIP and RTP traffic both occur on UDP, TFTP traffic is UDP, and Call Manager traffic is TCP. Any other rules created would need to be configured for the protocol used by this service.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Service Ports'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the port information that is associated with the host. You can enter a single or range of ports that will be used for this service. SIP uses 5060, Call Manager uses 5048, and TFTP uses 69. Other services must be configured to use the appropriate ports.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Service Policy'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the umbrella rule for the service, which will be further defined under Add New Rules. The options are:
 
 
'''Deny List;''' '''ACCEPT ALL EXCEPT''' rule will apply. This will allow all traffic on the defined port, allowing you to configure a list of Denied IP addresses.
 
 
'''Allow List:''' '''DROP ALL EXCEPT''' rule will apply. This will block all traffic on the defined port, allowing you to configure a list of Allowed IP addresses.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 10 – Add New Service Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
The following outlines the steps to add a new service in the PBX system.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Navigate to '''System''''''Access Control'''
 
# Click on the''' '''Access Control List button, The Access Control List page appears.
 
# From the '''Add New Service''' section, enter a Name, and select the appropriate Transport Protocol, Ports, and Policy; then click the '''Create Service''' button.
 
# The new service and its associated values will be displayed in the Service listing.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
The following table outlines the parameters and descriptions required for adding a new rule.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Feature'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Service'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This drop-down list is populated when a new services is added. This is done in the Add New Service section.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Host(s)'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the IP Address, Domain Name or URL of the host.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 11 – Add New Rule Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
=== Add New Rule ===
 
The following outlines the steps to add a new rule for Services in the PBX system.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Navigate to '''System''''''Access Control, '''click on the''' '''Access Control List button, the Access Control List appears.
 
# From the '''Add New Rule''' section, select the Service type from the drop-down list.
 
# Enter the '''Host/s '''to be allowed/denied by the service
 
# Click the '''Create Rule''' button.
 
# The new rule is added and will be displayed in the rules list.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database. .
 
 
=== Delete Rules or Services ===
 
The following outlines the steps to delete existing rules or services.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Service''' section of the '''PBX Access – Access Control List''' page, find the service or rule that you want to delete.
 
# Click on icon to the left of either the service or rule. The selected item is removed from the list.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
'''''Providers'''''
 
 
Providers are telephone lines, VoIP providers and other telecommunication resources. This section of the system’s online administration is where these provider resources are configured. The PBX system is equipped to handle two types of provider setting’s Hardware Trunks and SIP Providers.
 
 
 
== Hardware Trunks ==
 
Hardware trunks are associated with telephone lines that connect to the PSTN. These lines process inbound and outbound communication traffic that flows over communication channels. For example, a T1 can be a trunk resource that has multiple lines and multiple Direct Inward Dialed (DID) numbers. These individual numbers can be routed to different destinations within the system.
 
 
 
== Connection Types ==
 
The IP PBX is equipped to support an assortment of hardware cards as discussed earlier. Depending on which card you have, the PBX can integrate with analog lines, T1, or PRI.
 
 
== Provisioning a New Hardware Trunk Group ==
 
Provisioning a hardware trunk defines how the system works with the provider equipment, tells the system what phone numbers are associated with the trunk, and establishes rules for the system to follow when processing incoming and outgoing calls through this physical network connection.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 21 – Hardware Providers Trunk Setup Page'''</center>
 
 
The following table describes the fields and functions available on the Hardware Trunks Provider Configuration page.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Section'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''''Configuration Section'''''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Slot'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Defines which physical PCI slot the card is connected to.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Channels'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This indicates whether the card has channels configured. Using the mouse to hover over this field will provide you with the number of channels at are set for this card.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Model'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the model or type of card.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This button changes the card set in the database for the adjacent slot. The change is immediate and will delete trunks associated with another card in the same slot.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Selecting this button will take you to the Channel Group Parameters Card Configuration page, where you can create a channel group.
 
 
|-
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''''Channel Groups Section'''''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Name'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The name associated with this channel group.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Channels'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The number of channels that have been assigned.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Card'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The card number associated with the channel group.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Action'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| - Clicking on the pencil icon allows you edit the settings for the selected channel group.
 
 
* - Clicking on the “'''X'''” icon allows you to delete/remove the selected channel group.
 
 
'''NOTE: You must delete channels from outbound routes in order to delete them.'''
 
 
|-
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''''T-1 Span Configuration'''''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Span'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Should automatically set to the appropriate span in regards to the cards that are installed in the PBX.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Timing'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Set per your providers instructions, “'''0'''” (zero) would be the PBX provides timing, “'''1'''” would be the timing is provided by the Provider.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''LBO'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Line Build Out, set per your providers instructions.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Framing'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Set per your provider’s instructions.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Coding'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Set per your provider’s instructions.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''PRI'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Check if the trunk is a PRI, leave blank if the trunk is a standard T-1.
 
 
|-
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''''T-1 PRI Configuration'''''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Span'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Should automatically set to the appropriate span in regards to the cards that are installed in the PBX.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Switch Type'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Defines what type of equipment the PBX is communicating with. Set per your provider’s instructions.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Reset Interval'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Set per your provider’s instructions.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Dialplan'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Set per your provider’s instructions.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Indication'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Set per your provider’s instructions.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''D Channel'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Set to 24.
 
 
|-
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''''USB Device Browser'''''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Slot'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Should automatically set to the appropriate slot that corresponds to the USB slot the device is connected to.
 
 
|-
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''''Hardware Functions'''''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Restart USB Devices & PBX Services'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This button will restart USB devices and PBX Services.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 12 – Hardware Trunk Provider Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
The following section outlines how to setup the parameters for hardware trunks.
 
 
===== Configuring Hardware Trunks =====
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Navigate to '''Providers''''''Hardware Trunks'''. The '''Hardware Trunk (Providers)''' page appears. The hardware trunks and their values that have already been provisioned will be displayed.
 
# The system will allow configuring of up to 2 cards that interface with analog or T-1 devices. Select the card models installed in your IP PBX individually and click '''Set '''button for each card in order to tell the system which cards you have.
 
# Once you have set the card, click the '''Add''' '''Lines''' button to the right of the corresponding card to define line/channel/trunk groups associated with that card. The '''Edit Hardware Provider''' page appears.
 
 
<center>'''Figure 22 – Add/Edit Hardware Provider Configuration Page'''</center>
 
 
 
# Edit the necessary parameters. Required fields are: Group Name, Signalling Type, Start Channel, and End Channel. The rest of the fields can be configured as needed, or left at their defaults. (refer to the table below for descriptions and recommended settings)
 
# Click on the button.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page to commit the changes to the database.
 
# Once the changes are applied, navigate to the '''Hardware Providers''' page and click the '''Restart USB and PBX Services''' button.
 
 
The following table describes the fields and parameters available on the '''Add/Edit Hardware Provider Configuration''' page:
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Section/Field'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Channel Group Parameters Card 1'''''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Group Name'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the name for the groups of channels you want to create. This Group Name will be associated with the line/channel group.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Signaling Type'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the type of signaling used for these channels/lines. Recommendation and default settings are listed below:
 
 
* '''Analog''' lines should be set to '''fxs_ks'''.
 
* '''T-1 '''lines should be set to '''fxs_ls''' or '''em_w'''
 
* '''T-1 PRI''' lines should be set to '''pri_cpe.'''
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Generate Ringing on Outbound Calls?'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This should only be checked if the telephone company is not providing ringing. Default this is '''disabled'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Answer Incoming?'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This indicates whether the system should answer incoming calls on these lines/channels. The default value is '''Yes'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Start & End Channel'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Used to define the Start and End channel for this group on the associated card. If you would like a 1 channel group set the start and end channel to the same value (i.e. '''Start=1 and End=1''').
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: If you wish to address analog lines individually you must build multiple single channel groups. T1 and PRI can be grouped with multiple channels and routed via DID.'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Allow Caller to transfer outbound call?'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This indicates whether the system will allow user to transfer a call they origninated that has been connected to the PSTN. Default this is '''disabled'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Answer After'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If the system is configured to answer incoming calls, this defines how many seconds to wait before answering the call. At times this field needs to be tweaked to ensure consistent CID. Default this is set to '''0'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Dial Prefix'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Digits defined here will be dialed out the trunk ahead of the digits dialed by the user. This would be required if your provider needs a 9 or some other digit to dial outbound. Analog trunks might need a one second pause which is denoted by a lowercase w. Default this is '''blank'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Allow Call Recording?'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This setting toggles the ability to record calls on this trunk. Default this is '''disabled'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ext CID Override?'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This setting allows the users to set an alternate caller ID under their extension that will override the outgoing caller ID. If this is '''enabled''', then this allows extension caller id override capabilities. Default this is '''disabled'''.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Restrict CID Override?'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This setting is used to limit an extension’s ability to override Caller ID (CID). If '''enabled''', this allows extension CID Override only for the phone numbers defined for this provider. Default this is '''disabled'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Use Caller ID'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This setting indicates whether the system should attempt to detect caller id on the lines/channels in this group. Default this is set to '''Yes'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Echo Cancellation'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to configure the Echo Cancel parameter. By default this is set to '''Yes (128) '''which will work in most scenarios. Adjustments can be made as needed.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''RX Gain'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to set or adjust the gain on sound received from these lines/channels. Typically these settings don’t need to be changed from default settings, unless there are issues relating to the volume on the calls. (This setting is in decibels so 3.0 = 100% increases in volume). Default this is set to '''0.0'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''TX Gain'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to set or adjust the gain on sound transmitted to these lines/channels. Typically these settings don’t need to be changed from default settings, unless there are issues with the volume on the calls. (This setting is in decibles so 3.0 = 100% increases in volume). Default this is set to '''0.0'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Inbound Caller ID'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the name of the Caller ID of the inbound calls on this trunk. If set to the system default “'''asreceived'''', the calls will capture the Caller ID information sent over the incoming lines. Otherwise you can override the name and number that appears to those receiving calls on the corresponding channels.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: If you need to change this parameter, we recommend that you contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group at (941) 306-2200 for the proper syntax or additional information.'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Echo Cancellation Bridged'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to '''enable or disable''' the Echo Cancellation Bridge parameter on calls routed internally across the network. Set this parameter to”'''YES'''” (enable) if you want echo cancellation on calls that are bridged from one port to another on the network. Default this is set to '''No'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Busy Detect'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| By default, this is set to '''YES '''and''' 8'''. This allows you to enable/disable and set the number of busy signals the system will detect before disconnecting from the call (hanging up). Set the parameter to “'''YES'''” if you want the PBX to hang up after it detects a busy signal.
 
 
The number field is the number of busy tones the system must detect before it disconnects from the call (hangs up).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Outbound Caller ID Name'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Any values entered here will display as the Outbound CID Name when making calls out this trunk. If this is left blank, the name displayed on outbound calls will match what is registered with the provider. '''Blank''' by default.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Outbound Caller ID Number'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Any numbers entered here will display as the Outbound CID number when making calls out this trunk. If this is left blank, the number displayed on outbound calls will match what is registered with the provider. '''Blank''' by default.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Echo Training'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This parameter is used to adjust the time spent training the echo cancellation algorithm before a call is picked up. The length of time is set in milliseconds (ms), and is set to '''800''' by default.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Route Calls to'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the default destination for the trunk. A destination is where calls from this provider will be routed to, unless a specific Direct Inward Dial (DID) is indicated. A typical destination is defined as a Menu, Extension, Schedule, Voicemail, or a Ring Group. This can also be set under the Incoming Routing page.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Relax DTMF (Detection)'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to turn '''On/Off''' the Relax DTMF detection. Enabling this setting allows the line/channels to be more permissive of tone lengths and result in over detecting. By default this is set to '''No'''.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: We recommend that this parameter is set to NO unless you are having issues. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance or more information.'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''DTMF Tone Duration'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to set the DTMF tone duration in milliseconds (ms) for generated tones generated by calls bridged to SIP devices. Default value of '''300'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Use Inbound CoS'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to enable/disable inbound routing and provides the dial plan that corresponds to the outbound routes in this Class of Service (CoS). This is '''Off '''by default.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Use this only if you intend to provide PSTN connectivity to 3<sup>rd</sup> party equipment. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance or more information.'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Phone Numbers'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| On a T1 or PRI, this is where you would configure any DID information. Only numbers or a + should be entered for a DID. Once configured, you can define a different inbound destination for each number, allowing you to route calls to separate places. Contact your provider to find out if they are sending 4, 7, or 10 digits inbound for the DID.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 13 – Hardware Provider Configuration Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
==== Add Phone Numbers to Hardware Provider ====
 
Once all the destinations are created, they will appear in a drop-down list and can be selected for updating.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
''If a DID destination is set to NONE, it will route to the default location for the trunk itself.''
 
 
 
# From '''Channel Groups''' section of the '''Hardware Provider''' page, click the icon to the right of the name you want to modify. The '''Edit Hardware Providers''' page appears.
 
# The hardware trunks and their values that have already been provisioned will be displayed. Scroll down the page to the '''Phone Numbers''' section. Enter the phone number that you want to add then click the '''ADD''' button. You can also copy and paste a list in. The list should be separated by newline characters.
 
# The phone number entered will appear in the drop-down list to the right of the '''ADD''' button. The numbers will be listed in sequential order.
 
# Click on the button to save the changes to the system.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Remove Phone Numbers from Hardware Provider ====
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From '''Channel Groups''' section of the '''Hardware Provider''' page, click the icon to the right of the name you want to modify. The '''Edit Hardware Providers''' page appears.
 
# Scroll down the page and click on the field to the left of the '''REMOVE''' button. Scroll through the drop-down list to find the phone number that you want to remove.
 
# Click on the desired phone number. Click on the '''REMOVE''' button to the right of the list. The phone number is deleted and will not appear in the drop-down list.
 
 
''Use the CTRL or SHIFT button to select multiple or a range of extensions from the list.''
 
 
# Click on the button to save the changes to the system.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
== Provisioning SIP Providers ==
 
SIP Providers are VoIP service provider accounts or other SIP-based devices that provide PSTN connectivity. SIP provider accounts can have multiple phone numbers or Direct Inward Dialing numbers (DIDs). The individual numbers can be routed to different destinations within the system as DIDs.
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: SIP Providers settings vary widely. To simplify the provisioning process, we recommend that you ask the provider for a sample Asterisk configuration. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance.'''
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Figure 23 – SIP Providers Configuration Main Page'''</center>
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 24 – Add/Edit SIP Provider Configuration Page 1'''</center>
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 25 – Add/Edit SIP Provider Configuration Page 2'''</center>
 
 
 
The following table describes the fields and functions available on the SIP Provider Configuration page:
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''''SIP Provider Section'''''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Name'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Name assigned to the SIP Provider. If given a username, this needs to match that field.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''User Type'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| User type of the associated SIP Provider. This can be User, Friend, or Peer.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''DTMF Mode'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| DTMF tone for the trunk. This can be Inband, rfc2833, info, or auto.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''RFC2833 Compensate'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This advanced feature is sometimes necessary when using RFC2833 is problematic or if the SIP provider has indicated that it is required.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Host'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The domain or IP address associated with the SIP host.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Port'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If your SIP provider requires registration on a port other than the default 5060, set this field to Custom and enter that port value; otherwise set to Default.
 
 
'''NOTE: Be sure to forward this alternate port in your router or the traffic will not be passed through.'''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Register'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Registration option for the SIP Provider.
 
 
* '''YES''' = Automatically generates based upon provided settings
 
* '''NO''' = Doesn’t require authentication from the SIP Provider
 
* '''CUSTOM''' =Allows for any special authentication rules required from the SIP Provider
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Authentication'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Authentication (previously “Authorization”) requirements for the SIP Provider.
 
 
* '''YES''' = Automatically generates based upon provided settings
 
* '''NO''' = Doesn’t require authentication from the SIP Provider
 
* '''CUSTOM''' =Allows for any special authentication rules required from the SIP Provider
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Authorized User'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Some providers require a different Authorization User Name than the Username provided. The sample asterisk configuration from your provider will let you know if this field needs to be set to '''Custom'''<nowiki>; otherwise set to </nowiki>'''Default.'''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''From User'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The sample asterisk configuration from your provider will let you know if this field needs to be set to '''Custom'''<nowiki>; otherwise set as </nowiki>'''Default.'''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''From Domain'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This parameter is rarely used and if needed, the SIP Domain information can be obtained from your SIP Provider
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Realm'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If your provider requires you to set the Realm to something other than asterisk, set to '''Custom''' and enter the realm given; otherwise this can be set to '''Default'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Outbound Proxy'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Enable''' if the SIP Provider requires you to provide a different outbound IP address, otherwise leave as '''Default'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Username'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Username used for Registration and Authentication.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Secret'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The password used for SIP Registration and Authentication.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Inbound Caller ID'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This parameter should be left blank to display incoming caller ID as received. Otherwise you can override the name and number that appears to those receiving calls on the corresponding channels.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: If you need to configure the system in a different way, please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance and the proper syntax needed.'''
 
 
'''Contact us via phone at 941-306-2200 option 2 or via email at [mailto:support@ipitomy.com support@ipitomy.com]. Additional information can be found at faq.ipitomy.com.'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Outbound Caller ID Name'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Enter an outbound Caller ID name that will override the Caller ID name that is displayed on outgoing calls through this provider.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Outbound Caller ID Number'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Enter the Caller ID number that will override on outgoing calls through this provider..
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Call Limit'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Set to match the number of concurrent calls allowed by the SIP trunk. (Usually consistent with SIP provider subscription limit.)
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Qualify'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the number of milliseconds (ms) the system should wait before checking to see if the SIP provider is available. Check with your provider to see what value this should be set to. Typically this can be left at the default value of 30000.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Default Destination'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is where all inbound calls will be routed to, unless a different specific destination is designated for DIDs on an individual basis.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Dial Prefix'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Set this parameter only if the SIP Provider requires it.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Area Code'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This parameter is obsolete and will be removed in future releases.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Generate Ringing On Outbound Calls'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This parameter should only be enabled (checked) if ringing is not provided by the SIP Provider.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Allow Outbound Caller to transfer'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Enabling this parameter allows a user to transfer a call that they originated on this trunk. Default is '''disabled.'''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Allow Call Recording'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If enabled (checked), this parameter allows calls to be recorded.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ext CID Override'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If enabled (checked), this parameter allow the users to set an alternate caller ID under their extension that will override the outgoing Caller ID. Default is '''disabled.'''
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Contact your provider to determine whether CID override is allowed on your specific trunk'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Restrict CID Override?'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This setting is used to limit an extension’s ability to override Caller ID (CID). If '''enabled''', this allows extension CID Override only for the phone numbers defined for this provider. Default this is '''disabled'''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Can Reinvite'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This parameter allows a mechanism to reconnecting calls midstream.
 
 
* '''YES''' = if the phone type allows the re-invite feature
 
* '''NO''' = if the phone type does not allow the re-invite feature
 
* '''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX Setup'''SIPAdvanced'''. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Send Remote Party ID'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Usually not required. Leave on “N/A” unless advised differently by tech support.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Trust Remote Party ID'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Usually not required. Leave on “N/A” unless advised differently by tech support.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Insecure'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This parameter allows you to specify how to handle connections with peers. Explanation of the different options available on the drop-down list are:
 
 
* '''PORT''' = Ignore the port number where authentication came from.
 
* '''INVITE''' = Do not require the initial invite to authenticate.
 
* '''PORT+INVITE''' = Do not require initial invite to authenticate and ignore the port where the request came from.
 
* '''YES''' – To match a peer based by IP Address only and not the port.
 
* '''VERY''' – To allow registered hosts to call without re-authenticating.
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Allow Codecs'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Encodes a stream or signal for transmission. Select which codecs will be enabled for this provider. Can typically be left to defaults.
 
 
|-
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''''Phone Numbers Section'''''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Phone Numbers'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is where you would configure any DID information. Only numbers or a + should be entered for a DID. Once configured, you can define a different inbound destination for each number, allowing you to route calls to separate places. Contact your provider to find out if they are sending 4, 7, or 10 digits inbound for the DID.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 14 – SIP Provider Configuration Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
=== Add New SIP Provider ===
 
The following section outlines the steps to add a new SIP Provider in the PBX system.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Click '''Providers''''''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.
 
# Click on the button. The '''Edit SIP Provider''' page is displayed.
 
# Configure the pertinent fields per your SIP Providers instructions. See the table above for descriptions.
 
# Click on the button.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Add Phone Numbers ====
 
The following section outlines the steps to Add phone numbers to the SIP Provider.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Click '''Providers''''''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.
 
# From the SIP Providers page, select the SIP provider link (under the '''Name '''field) or the icon to the left of the provider you want to modify. The '''Edit SIP Providers''' page appears.
 
# Scroll down to the '''Phone Numbers''' section of the page. Enter the phone number in the box above the ADD button then click '''ADD'''. The number enter will appear in the list to the right of the box.
 
# To add multiple phone numbers at one time, press the '''ENTER''' key to move to the next space on the list then enter the number. Click on the '''ADD''' button and all the numbers will appear in the list box (on the right). You can also copy and paste a list in. The list should be separated by newline characters.
 
# Click on the button, once all the numbers have been added, to save the changes.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Remove Phone Numbers ====
 
The following section outlines the steps to remove phone numbers from the SIP Provider.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Click '''Providers''''''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.
 
# From the SIP Providers page, select the SIP provider link (under the '''Name '''field) or the icon to the left of the provider you want to modify. The '''Edit SIP Providers''' page appears.
 
# Scroll down to the '''Phone Numbers''' section of the page. Select the number that you want to remove from the list then click the '''REMOVE''' button. The number enter will be deleted from the list.
 
# To remove multiple phone numbers, hold down the '''SHIFT''' key to select the numbers in sequence or the '''CTRL''' key to select in random order. Click the '''REMOVE''' button to delete the numbers selected.
 
# Click on the button, to save the changes.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Set Destination ====
 
The following section outlines the steps to set a Destination for DID phone numbers.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Click '''Providers''''''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.
 
# From the SIP Providers page, select the SIP provider link (under the '''Name '''field) or the icon to the left of the provider you want to modify. The '''Edit SIP Providers''' page appears.
 
# Scroll down to the '''Phone Numbers''' section of the page. Select the number that you want to assign a destination. Select the desired Destination from the drop-down list then click the '''SET''' button.
 
# To assign the same destination to multiple phone numbers, hold down the '''SHIFT''' key to select the numbers in sequence or the '''CTRL''' key to select in random order. Click the desired Destination from the drop-down list the click '''SET''' button. You can also set the destinations under Call Routing'''Outgoing.'''
 
# Click on the button, to save the changes.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
=== Delete SIP Provider ===
 
The following section outlines the steps to DELETE a SIP Provider in the PBX system.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: '''You must remove all instances of the SIP provider from any outbound dialing routes before you can delete it.
 
 
|}
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Click '''Providers''''''SIP Providers'''. The '''SIP Providers''' page appears.
 
# From the '''SIP Providers''' page, icon to the left of the provider you want to delete. The SIP provider will be removed and will no longer appear on the list.
 
# Click on the button, to save the changes.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
'''''Destinations'''''
 
 
Destinations are the various places that a call can be routed to within the system. The destinations drop-down list is populated as destinations are added to the system. During system implementation, if destinations are populated first it is easier to provision the hardware trunks because all of the destinations will be available in the drop down menu. These system destinations should be obtained in advance to simplify the setup process. In most cases, there will be a menu to setup for an automated attendant. There will also be business hours to setup. We recommend that you use the '''IPitomy Setup Worksheet '''to help you gather and organize the necessary provisioning information prior to installation (see the figure below). The Setup Worksheet can be found on IPitomy’s website.
 
 
'''''(Please refer to the “Installation Worksheet” section of this user guide for details on how to use the Setup Worksheet).'''''
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 26 – IP PBX Data Components'''</center>
 
 
 
* '''Extensions:''' are individual extensions assigned to a telephone. When an extension is created, a voicemail box is also created. This voicemail box is automatically the destination for an extension call which exceeds its ring time.
 
* '''Groups:''' are groups of extensions that can have different ringing strategies and can be routed from any trunk, another destination or dialed from an extension.
 
* '''Menus:''' are used for creating automated attendant menus to route callers to different destinations within the system. The voice prompt can also be used to play information like driving directions.
 
* '''Conference Rooms:''' allow multiple users to participate in the same call. Callers can be routed to a Conference via; direct dialing, through a DID, using an automated attendant or transferred by a person.
 
* '''Voicemail Boxes:''' are where callers leave a message when someone is not available at an extension. Voicemail boxes that are created separate from extensions can be used to route callers after hours or as an overflow destination. Note that in the current implementation Voicemail Boxes without an extension cannot be dialed with only the voicemail box number. You can enter as one leaving a message by dialing '''<nowiki>*+</nowiki>''' box number or you can check the messages by going through the voicemail gateway or dialing 924.
 
* '''Schedules:''' route callers to different destinations in the organization during specified times and dates.
 
* '''Branch Office:''' connections provide broadband access to other branch locations by dialing a short access code followed by the extension number. Branch Extensions can also be defined as part of a branch office. These are remote extensions that can be dialed directly as though they were local extensions on your PBX. Branch Extensions also appear in drop down boxes for routing calls to specific destinations.
 
 
'''''Extensions'''''
 
 
Extensions define where specific people or departments can be reached in an organization. They should be setup first in the system. The following is a list of the various settings/parameters that will can be updated for each extension. The parameters you configure for the extensions will vary based on the customer’s general business practices.
 
 
 
* '''General Settings'''
 
* '''Forwarding Settings'''
 
* '''Advanced Network Settings'''
 
* '''Advanced Voicemail Settings'''
 
* '''Advanced Allow Codecs Settings'''
 
* '''Advanced Calling Permissions'''
 
* '''Advanced Follow-Me'''
 
 
'''Add/Import Tab'''
 
 
The '''Add/Import '''tab allows you to create new extensions or edit existing extensions.
 
 
 
''Use the Setup Worksheet to upload the CSV file and automatically create the Extension information. Please refer to the Setup Worksheet section of this guide for details.''
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 27 – Extensions Add/Import Page'''</center>
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 28 – Create Extensions Page'''</center>
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Extension Name'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the name of the person that the extension will be assigned to (using this device).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Email Address'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the user’s email address (optional)
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ext'''. #
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The extension number that is assigned to this device.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Device Type'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the type of device that will be using this extension (i.e. IP550).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''MAC'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the MAC ID of the device (optional).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''AutoNumber/Start At'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Selecting this option allows you to automatically number the extensions that you need to add. To use this feature, simply enter the extension number you want to start with then select (place a checkmark) the AutoNumber option.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 15 – Create Extension Fields and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
==== Add/Create Extensions ====
 
This section describes in detail how to create a new extension.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From any page of the PBX Admin system, click on the button next to the '''Destinations''' link to expand the menu. The '''Destination''' menu opens and displays the options available.
 
# Click on the '''Extensions''' link. The Extensions page opens and displays a listing of extensions (if ones already exists).
 
# Click on the box to the left of the '''Extensions '''field. This value defaults to “'''10'''”. Enter the number of extensions you want to add and then click the '''ADD''' button.
 
# The '''Create Extensions''' page appears displaying the number of rows that was specified. Enter information for the extension in these fields. See table above for details.
 
 
''You can have the system automatically number the extensions you want to create by clicking the '''AutoNumber''' checkbox located on the top left hand corner of the '''Create Extensions''' page. ''
 
 
# Click on the '''CREATE''' button when all the extension information you want to create is entered. The system responds with a message indicating the results of adding the new extension(s). You should see a “'''SUCCESS'''” message.
 
# If there is an error, you will see an “'''ERROR'''” indicated under the Results field. An error is typically due to an extension number that is being duplicated (already existing in the system). Make the necessary adjustments to correct the error then click the '''CREATE''' button.
 
# Click on the button, to save the changes.
 
# Select the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
'''Search Tab'''
 
 
This tab allows the user to search the extensions for keywords in the fields: Class of Service, Departments, Name, Numbers, CID Names, CID Numbers, Email, or Status .This section describes in detail how to search for existing extensions.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 29 – Search Extension Page'''</center>
 
 
The following table describes the types of search parameters the system will perform.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Class of Service'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the class of service that is assigned to the extension(s).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Departments'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the department that is assigned to the extension(s).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Names'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the name of the user assigned to the extension(s).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Numbers'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the extension number.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''CID Names'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The caller ID name that is associated with the extension(s).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''CID Numbers'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the caller ID number that is associated with the extension(s).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Emails'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Email address that is associated with the extension(s).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Status'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the status of the extension(s).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Match Search Filter'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Exact''' – indicates that you want the search to match exactly as the search criteria that is entered.
 
 
'''Partial''' – indicates that you want to partially match the search criteria entered.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 16 – Search Extension Parameters and Description'''</center>
 
 
==== Search Extension ====
 
This section describes how to search for extensions.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Extensions''' page, click the '''Search Tab'''. The list of extensions that are in the system appears with search options at the top section of the page.
 
# Click the drop-down arrow icon next to the '''Class of Service''' list.
 
 
Select the desired '''search criteria''' then enter the parameters in the box to the right of the list then click the '''Search''' button. If the system finds any extensions matching your search parameter, it will display the information in the extensions window.
 
 
''If the field is left blank, the system will bring all the extensions.''
 
 
=== View Tab (Extensions) ===
 
This tab allows the user to sort the display of extensions by Phone Model. Once sorted, phone key settings can be mass edited for phones of the same model. This section describes in detail how to view existing extensions.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 30 – Extensions View Page'''</center>
 
 
==== Edit or View Extension ====
 
This section describes in detail how to view or edit extension details.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Navigate to the '''Destinations''''''Extensions''' page.
 
# Select the or the icon to the right of the extension name you want to view or edit. The pencil edits the PBX settings and the pencil with the handset behind it edits the Phone settings.
 
# The '''Edit Extensions''' page displays with setting details for the extension.
 
# Make the necessary changes to the extension.
 
# Click on the button to save the changes.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
''You can edit multiple extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark in the box next to extension name). Only the fields being changed (that is common for all extensions selected) will be modified – i.e. Status or call group, etc.). ''
 
 
''Another shortcut that the system provides you is the '''Previous''' and '''Next''' button located on the top left corner of the '''Edit Extension''' page. Use these buttons to navigate backward or forward to find the extensions you want to view or modify.''
 
 
==== Mass Edit PBX Extension Settings ====
 
This section describes in detail how to view or edit extension details.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Destinations''''''Extensions''' page, click on the '''View''' tab. A list of extensions appears.
 
 
''You can sort the list by phone model by selecting (placing a checkmark) the''' Phone Model & Settings''' option located in the top left hand corner of the screen. If you are using this method, you can also Mass Edit Phone Key settings. See the section below for steps.''
 
 
# Select (place a checkmark) in the box next to the extension name(s) you want to view or edit.
 
# Click on the '''Edit PBX Settings''' button. The extension details page appears. On the top left corner of the screen, you will see the extension numbers that you are viewing or editing.
 
# Make the necessary changes to the extension settings then click on the button to save the changes.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Mass Edit Phone Key Settings ====
 
This section of the Administration Guide describes how to mass edit the key settings for extensions using the same phone model.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 31 - Extensions View Tab (Mass Edit Feature)'''</center>
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Destinations''''''Extensions''' page, click on the '''View '''tab.
 
# Select the '''Phone Models and Settings''' option at the top left hand corner of the list.
 
# The system will display a list of the extensions in a grouping of phone types. Select the group of phones you want to edit. A listing of all the extensions in the phone group will appear.
 
# Select the box next to the name of the extensions you want to update or click on box next to the '''Name''' field at the top of the column to select all the extensions.
 
# Click the '''Edit Phone Settings''' button. The system will take you to the '''Key Settings''' page for the phones. At the top of the page you will see a list of all the extensions that you are updating.
 
# By default, the '''Only Save Changed Fields''' option Is selected, de-select if needed.
 
# Once all the changes are made, select the '''Save and Restart''' '''Phone''' button to save changes and reboot the phones so they can pull down their updated configuration file.
 
 
==== Delete Extension ====
 
This section describes in detail how to delete existing extensions.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Navigate to the '''Destinations''''''Extensions''' page
 
# Select the icon to the right of the extension name you want to Delete
 
# The extension is deleted and a confirmation message will appear. Click '''OK''' on the message window.
 
# The system returns you to the '''Extensions''' page. The extension that was just deleted will no longer appear on the list of extensions.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Delete Multiple Extension ====
 
This section describes in detail how to delete multiple extensions.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Navigate to the '''Destinations''''''Extensions''' page
 
# Select (place a checkmark) in the boxes next to the extension name(s) you want to delete.
 
# Click on the Delete All button. The selected extension will be removed from the list and deleted from the database.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the top right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
=== Extensions - General Settings Section ===
 
Once the extensions have been added to the database, you can edit the settings for each of the extensions.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 32 – Extensions General Settings Section'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Name'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Name of the user associated with the extensions being created
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Number'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Extension number for this person or department. This must be 3 to 4 digits in length
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Email'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Email address for the person assigned to the extension. This will allow the system to forward email messages to the address of the person at the extension when properly configured.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Status'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Active''' = currently in use
 
 
'''Disabled''' = currently not in use
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Class of Service'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the service type for the extension. When initially created, the PBX will set this to the COS you have definined as the system default class of service on the PBX SetupGeneral Page
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''PIN'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the number used to access the extensions voicemail and can be between 1 and 6 digits long. The default setting is for the PIN to be the extension number. Be sure to instruct users to change the PIN to avoid unauthorized use.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Ring Time'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the time in seconds that a call will ring before it is considered unanswered. Ring time must be between 1 and 100 seconds in length.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Call Group'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This number assigns this extension to a group with a similar purpose (e.g., Sales or Customer Service). Multiple call groups can be assigned to each extension by putting a comma between the group numbers. The call groups also define which Pickup Groups can answer calls to this extension.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Pickup Group'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This number should match any Call Group number entered on an extension. It defines the Call Group Numbers this extension can pickup remotely by pressing 99.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Apply Schedule'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| When an extension is created, a schedule destination is created automatically. This schedule is not activated until the Apply Schedule box is selected. When it is selected, all calls sent directly to this extension must first pass through the extension’s schedule and will be routed accordingly. Extension schedules will appear with the name of the extension (e.g., Extension 123 would appear as “ext_123”). ''(See the Schedules section of this guide for more information.)''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''CID Override'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If enabled, the user will be able to override the Caller ID settings. When the user places a call, the original assigned CID will be bypassed and the name and number will that is entered in the CID Name and Number fields will be sent instead. Always check with your provider that CID override is allowed before configuring.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''CID Name'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If the CID Override parameter is enabled, this is the Caller ID name that will be seen by the recipient when an outbound call is placed. Always check with your provider that CID override is allowed before configuring.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''CID Number'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If the CID Override parameter is enabled, this is the Caller ID number that will be seen by the recipient when an outbound call is placed. Always check with your provider that CID override is allowed before configuring.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Detect Fax'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If checked, calls from an Analog or T1/PRI card that route direct to this extension will spend a period of time (Defined under PBX SetupGeneral) checking if the call is a fax. During this time, the PBX holds the call; if fax tone is detected, the call will be passed along to the destination defined for Route Fax To, otherwise it will pass the call to the extension after the detection time has expired.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Route Fax To'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Define where calls will be routed if fax tone is detected.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 17 – General Extension Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
=== Extensions - Forward Settings Section ===
 
The extensions forwarding settings are made to be very user friendly. The settings may be modified from the Smart Personal Console, changed from your telephone extension, or changed remotely from any telephone (including cell phones), using the touch-tone key pad.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 33 – Extensions Forward Settings Section'''</center>
 
 
 
Forward settings routes calls to a different destination. These settings can be:
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Unconditional'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Always route calls to a specific destination.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Busy'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Route calls to a specific destination when the extension is in use or do not disturb is enabled.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''No Answer'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Route calls to a specific destination when a call is not answered in the defined Ring Time
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Unavailable'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Route calls to a specific destination when a phone is turned off, is not registered with the system, or has reached its call limit (as set in the IPitomy IP PBX).
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 18 – Extension Forward Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
==== Enable/Disable Forward Settings ====
 
The following outlines steps to enable or disable forward settings:
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Pick the setting to be modified – Unconditional, Busy, No Answer or Unavailable.
 
# Select '''Enabled''' or '''Disabled'''. Disabled turns the forward setting off. Enabled turns the forward setting on.
 
# Select either Phone Number or Destination. Phone Number allows you to enter the digits you want dialed, like a PSTN number. Destination will bring up the standard dropdown list of destinations in the system; Extensions, Groups, etc.
 
# Enter the Phone Number or select the Destination you would like the PBX to route to when meeting the forwarding requirements.
 
# Click button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Change Unconditional Forwarding via Keypad ====
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
Only unconditional forwarding can be changed from a touch-tone keypad. Enter the following code to set the unconditional forwarding setting.
 
 
# Dial '''<nowiki>*90</nowiki>''' to '''disable''' forwarding.
 
# Dial '''<nowiki>*91</nowiki>''' to '''enable''' forwarding.
 
# Dial '''<nowiki>*92</nowiki>''' to '''set''' the forwarding number.
 
 
==== Change Unconditional Forwarding via PC ====
 
The following outlines the steps for the end user to change the extension forwarding setting from a PC using the Smart Personal Console. The administrator will need to have enabled Allow User to control Forwarding under the extensions calling permissions.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Browse the internet to the '''Smart Personal Console''' page.
 
# Login.
 
# Click the link to access the forwarding page.
 
# Enable/Disable the desired forwarding setting.
 
# Select either Phone Number or Destination. Phone Number allows you to enter the digits you want dialed, like a PSTN number. Destination will bring up the standard dropdown list of destinations in the system; Extensions, Groups, etc.
 
# Enter the Phone Number or select the Destination you would like the PBX to route to when meeting the forwarding requirements.
 
# Click button to save the changes
 
 
==== Change Forwarding Number While Away from an Extension ====
 
Only unconditional forwarding can be changed from a touch-tone keypad.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Call into the '''Automated Attendant''' (menu).
 
# Select the touch-tone digit that routes to the Forwarding Gateway.
 
# The system will prompt for an '''Extension Number''' and '''Password'''.
 
# The system will indicate if extension forwarding is '''Enabled''' or '''Disabled'''.
 
# Pressing “'''1'''” toggles between Enabled and Disabled.
 
# Pressing “'''2'''” allows the forwarding destination to be modified.
 
 
=== Extensions - Advanced Settings ===
 
==== Extensions - Network Settings Section ====
 
Network settings automatically register in the extension through the system. These settings represent registration and identification information. The system (extension) defaults should not be changed without advanced knowledge of the behaviors of the particular settings.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 34 – Extensions Advanced Network Settings Page'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''SIP Password'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Password for the user to access IP PBX web-based administration system. Use a combination of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, and numbers.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Generate'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If clicked, the system will automatically generate a password for the extension.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Password Strength'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This color code bar indicates the '''strength of the password''' being assigned for the extension. The strengths are represented with the following colors:
 
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Location'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows the user to tell the PBX whether to expect this extension to register as a local extension (LAN) or as a remote extension (WAN).
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''NAT'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: This setting should be ENABLED (checked) unless otherwise instructed. Please contact an IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance or more information.'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''HOST'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: This should be set to DYNAMIC unless otherwise instructed. Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance.'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Phone Type'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The phone type is a drop down list for selecting which IP phone hardware is being used on the extension. IPitomy supports Aastra<sup></sup> phones as well as our own IP550 and IP120 phones, and will be adding additional phone types in the future. When the phone type is selected, another configuration option is available to program the button mapping of each telephone model. The IPitomy IP PBX supports a variety of pre-programmed buttons like BLF, park, voicemail, as well as custom configurable speed dial buttons. Each phone can be configured for its own unique set of buttons.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Phone MAC'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| All of the IP phones have a MAC Address. The MAC ID identifies the piece of equipment for configuration. The auto configuration features of IPitomy rely on the MAC address to load the proper configuration files into the telephone when changes are made in the Web-based interface. The configuration files are stored on the IPitomy IP PBX and used when the phone powers back on after a power down cycle. If the configuration files have been updated when the phone powers back on, a new configuration is loaded into the phone. When the new configuration file is loaded, manual settings on the phone take priority and will be kept intact during the upgrade. Note that at this time only Aastra<sup></sup> phones require and utilize the MAC address in the phone settings.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Qualify'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the interval of time between checking registration for the phone. Default is set to 8000 and should not be changed unless instructed by an IPitomy representative.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''DTMF Mode'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is where you set what kind of DTMF signaling the extension will use. The dropdown lists options are:
 
 
* rfc2833 (recommended in the HD Phone models)
 
* auto
 
* info (recommended in the IPitomy legacy phone models IP120 & IP550)
 
* inband
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''User Type'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is defaulted to '''Friend''' and should not be changed unless instructed to do so by an IPitomy representative.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Call Limit'''
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the number of concurrent calls allowable at an extension. The Call Limit selected must be between '''1 '''and '''99'''. Default is set to '''4'''. It needs to be above '''0''' for BLF keys to function.
 
| style="border-top:none;border-bottom:none;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding:0in;"|
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Can Reinvite'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This parameter allows a device to reconnect calls midstream.
 
 
* '''YES''' = if the phone type allows the re-invite feature
 
* '''NO''' = if the phone type does not allow the re-invite feature
 
* '''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined in the System Setup section of the Administration System. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Insecure'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This parameter allows you to specify how to handle connections with peers. Explanation of the different options available on the drop-down list are:
 
 
* '''PORT''' = Ignore the port number where authentication came from.
 
* '''INVITE''' = Do not require the initial invite to authenticate.
 
* '''PORT.INVITE''' = Do not require initial invite to authenticate and ignore the port where the request came from.
 
* '''YES''' – To match a peer based by IP Address only and not the port.
 
* '''VERY''' – To allow registered hosts to call without re-authenticating. This is the default setting.
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Music On Hold'''
 
| colspan="2"  style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This setting allows the user to select a different Music On Hold playlist for their extension then the system default playlist.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 19 – Extensions Advanced Networking Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
===== Edit Extensions - Network Settings =====
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name.
 
 
''You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.''
 
 
# The '''Extension Details''' page appears. Select the link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.
 
# Make the necessary changes in the '''Network Settings''' section of the page.
 
# Click button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Extensions - Voicemail Settings Section ====
 
These settings manage voicemail messaging and routing. Mailboxes created when the extension is built can either be edited on the Advanded section of the extension or on the Voicemail section under Destinations.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 35 – Extensions Voicemail Settings Section'''</center>
 
 
 
This table describes the voicemail setting options for each extension.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Mailbox'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the number associated with the extension.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Attach to Email'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Select to enclose the message received in a notification e-mail as an attachment to the email address entered for the extension. An audio file (.Wav) will be the attachment. This requires for Unified Messaging to be configured on the PBX.
 
 
'''YES''' = attach message to email.
 
 
'''NO''' =do not attach message to email.
 
 
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX SetupVoicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Delete After Emailing'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Delete the voicemail after it has been emailed to the email address provided for the extension in General Settings.
 
 
'''YES''' = delete message after emailing.
 
 
'''NO''' = do not delete message after emailing.
 
 
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX SetupVoicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.
 
 
'''Note: This option should not be enabled with turn old after emailing. If you enable both, the message will not be emailed but it will be deleted.'''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Turn Old After Emailing'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| After emailing, the system moves the voicemail message to the Old folder.
 
 
'''YES''' = will move message to Old messages folder after emailing.
 
 
'''NO''' = messages will not be moved after emailing.
 
 
'''Note: This option should not be enabled with delete after emailing. If you enable both, the message will not be emailed but it will be deleted.'''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Say Caller ID'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| State Caller ID prior to playback of the message.
 
 
'''YES''' = play caller id prior to message content.
 
 
'''NO''' = do not play caller id prior to message content.
 
 
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX SetupVoicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow Review'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Allow callers to review a message after they have recorded it.
 
 
'''YES''' = give callers leaving messages the option to review and rerecord the message they are leaving.
 
 
'''NO''' = do not give callers the option to rerecord.
 
 
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX SetupVoicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow Operator'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Allow pressing “0” during the voicemail greeting to reach the system-wide operator.
 
 
'''YES''' = allow dialing 0 from mailbox.
 
 
'''NO''' = disallow dialing 0 from mailbox.
 
 
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX SetupVoicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Play Envelope Message'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Play the time of call prior to the message.
 
 
'''YES''' = enabled.
 
 
'''NO''' = disabled.
 
 
'''N/A''' = accepts the system wide default defined under PBX SetupVoicemail. If the default setting is acceptable and works within your business, we recommend leaving the parameter set to N/A.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Auto Delete Voicemail In'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Define the number of days in which voicemail messages are to be automatically deleted from a mailbox. If this is set to “'''0'''” (zero) the voicemail message will never expire.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow Dial Out Access'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows the ‘Dial Out’ feature when a user is listening to their voicemail.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Exclude from Directory'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This indicates whether to exclude this extension from the directory.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Mailbox Operator'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If a caller presses “'''0'''” (zero) while listening to your mailbox greeting, the caller will be routed to this destination. Also, this is where a user will be sent if he dials ”0” from this extension. '''Set this to None to use the system default''' '''which is set under PBX SetupGeneral.'''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Mailbox Exit Destination'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The Mailbox Exit Destination is where the system will route a caller who presses '''<nowiki>#</nowiki>''' when they finish leaving a voicemail message. '''Setting this to None will use the system default, which is set under PBX SetupGeneral.'''
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 20 – Voice Mail Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
===== Edit Voicemail Settings =====
 
The following outlines the steps to set voicemail parameters.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name.
 
 
''You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.''
 
 
# The '''Extension Detail '''page appears. Select the link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.
 
# Make the necessary changes in the '''Voicemail Settings''' section of the page.
 
# Click button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Extensions - Allow CODECs Section ====
 
These transmission speeds are configured by the service provider and designed to automatically register in the extension through the system.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 36 – Extensions CODECS Settings Page'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''CODEC Permissions (Allow CODECs)'''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Allows the administrator to define which codec the extension should use, and specify a priority from top down.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: Please contact IPitomy’s Technical Support Group for assistance if you feel you need to change these settings.'''
 
 
|}
 
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 21 – Extensions CODECS Settings and Recommendations'''</center>
 
 
 
===== Edit CODEC Settings =====
 
The following outlines the steps to set CODECs parameters.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name.
 
 
''You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.''
 
 
# The '''Extension Detail''' page appears. Select the link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.
 
# Make the necessary changes in the '''Allow CODECs Settings''' section of the page. Clicking Up or Down when highlighting a codec will allow you to raise or lower its usage priority.
 
# Click button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Extensions Calling Permissions Section ====
 
Calling permissions define the types of calls that can be sent and received from an extension and the call actions this extension can take. For example, you may want to limit who has the ability to monitor another extension.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 37 – Extensions Calling Permissions Section'''</center>
 
 
The following table describes the settings for an extension’s calling permissions.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow User to Control Forwarding'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to modify their forwarding and schedule settings when they log into the Smart Personal Console user interface.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow User to Control Follow-Me'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to modify their Follow-Me settings when they log into the Smart Personal Console user interface.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow User to Control Phone Key Settings'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to modify their Phone Key settings when they log into the Smart Personal Console user interface.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Internal Calls'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits calls made from internal extensions.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow Incoming Intercom Paging'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits a page to be heard through this extension.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow Outgoing Intercom Paging'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits a page to be made through this extension.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow User to Forward Calls'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits an extension to forward a call or voicemail message to another destination on the system.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow User to Record Calls'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits the extension to record phone conversations.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow user to Listen to Others’ Calls'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to listen to other user’s phone conversations.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow User to Whisper'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this allows the user to whisper to another user during a phone conversation. Whisper is similar to Listen but you can coach and only the person at the extension can hear.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow Others to Whisper'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), other extensions can Whisper to your extensions calls
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow Others to Listen'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), other extensions can Listen to your extensions calls
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow Others to Record this User’s Calls'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), other extensions can Record calls at your extension
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Allow Call Park'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), this permits extension to park a call.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''''Is Operator'''''
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If '''Enabled''' (checked), the extension is designated as an operator. Being an operator allows the extension to control Day/Night mode overrides.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 22 – Calling Permission Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
===== Add/Edit Calling Permissions =====
 
The following outlines the steps to set calling permissions for extensions.'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name.
 
 
''You can also '''edit multiple''' extensions by selecting (placing a checkmark) in the boxes to the left of the extensions you want to update. Click the Edit PBX Settings button located at the top right hand corner of the list.You will see the extensions that are currently being updated. Make sure that the “'''Only save the changed field'''s” box is selected.''
 
 
# The '''Extension Detail''' page appears. Select the link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.
 
# Make the necessary changes in the '''Calling Permissions''' section of the page.
 
# Click button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located on the right hand corner of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
==== Extensions - Follow-Me Section ====
 
The Follow Me feature allows the PBX to try and find a user by calling pre-configured numbers, simultaneously or in sequence of priority. Once answered, the called party is given the option to accept or reject the call. If the call is rejected, or not answered at all, the call will return to the PBX allowing the caller to leave a Voice Mail message.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 38 – Extensions Advanced Settings Follow Me Setup Page'''</center>
 
 
 
From this window it is easy to configure numbers to be dialed by the system in order to find the user. You can adjust the Name, Number (Number to be dialed), Type of Device that is being called, Rings to wait for an answer, and you can ''weight'' the priority from 1-20 (20 being lowest 1 being highest) to define search order.
 
 
The Use radio box allows you to easily turn on and off numbers to be dialed. Since the SPC can be accessed via remote management, this allows the users to modify and create these lists from remote locations easily. The following table details the parameters and descriptions necessary to configure the Follow-Me feature.
 
 
The system also allows you to record your own Prompts (recordings) under '''PBX''' '''Setup''''''Prompts''', and then use those prompts as custom messages for FollowMe feature.
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Play the Incoming Message to Caller before Starting Search =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| When '''Enabled''' (checked), the system plays the Status Prompt to the caller.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Record the Caller’s Name and Play it to You =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| When '''Enabled''' (checked), the caller will be asked to record their name, and will announce that recorded name prior to prompting the called party to accept or reject the call.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Play the Unreachable Message if You Could Not Be Found =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| When '''Enabled''' (checked), this will play the Sorry Prompt if the call is not answered, otherwise it goes right to the voicemail greeting.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Number of Seconds to Total Search Time so Caller Has Time to Listen & Record =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to configure how many seconds the system will spend searching for the called party. Default is 12 seconds.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Call From Prompt =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This plays when '''Record the Caller’s Name and Play it to You''' is '''enabled '''(checked). The system default message is '''“Incoming Call From”''' followed by the recording the caller made of their name.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== No Recording Prompt =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This plays when '''Record the Caller’s Name and Play it to You''' is '''disabled''' (not checked). The system default message of '''''“You have an incoming call”''''' followed by the Options Prompt.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Options Prompt =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This plays after you have answered the call and prompts you to press either “'''1'''” to '''accept''' the call or “'''2'''” to '''reject''' the call. The system default message can be changed, but the options remain the same.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Please Hold Prompt =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This plays to the caller alerting them that the system is going to find the user they are trying to reach. The system default message of '''''“Please hold while I try to locate the person you are calling”''''' will play during the search process.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Status Prompt =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This plays the system default message of '''''“The person you are calling is not at their desk, I will try to locate them for you”'''''.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Sorry Prompt =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This plays if the person could not be reached or they reject the call. The system default message of '''''“I’m sorry, but I was unable to locate the person you were calling”'''.''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Music On Hold =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to specify a particular Music On Hold playlist to play to the caller during the search process. The system default Music on Hold (set at PBX SetupMusic on Hold) will play when this parameter is set to system default.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Numbers =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| If selected (checked), the Follow Me feature will try to either simultaneously or in sequence of priority to try and locate you by using this call list.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 23 – Extensions Follow Me Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
===== Add/Edit Follow Me Settings =====
 
The following outlines the steps to set calling permissions for extensions.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Edit Extensions''' page, locate the extension that you want to update. Click the (edit extensions) icon to the right of the name.
 
# The '''Extension Detail''' page appears. Select the link to open the '''Advanced Settings''' page.
 
# Click on the '''Numbers and Settings''' button under the '''Follow-Me''' section of the '''Advanced''' page.
 
# The '''Administrator View – Follow-Me Settings/Extensions''' window appears.
 
# Make the necessary changes in the '''Follow-Me''' parameters. Click on the '''SAVE''' button to save the changes to the Follow-Me settings. A message confirming the changes will appear.
 
# Click the '''EXIT''' button to close the window.
 
# Click button to save the changes. The system returns you to the '''Edit Extensions''' page.
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
 
'''Provisioning - Auto-Discovery Tab'''
 
 
This network discovery tool will automatically detect new devices that have been added to the network. This feature helps identify phones and other devices connected to the network and allow you to configure networked phones. The IP PBX system provides you with the option to either scan the network, or if a scan has been done recently, you could select No Scan to save time.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 39 – Extensions Auto-Discovery Tab'''</center>
 
 
==== Start Auto-Discovery Scan ====
 
This section describes how to start the Auto-Discovery scan for active devices on the network.
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Destination''''''Extensions''' page, click the '''Auto-Discovery Tab'''.
 
# Select to either Scan or Not Scan the network and an Alert message indicating that the system is scanning the network for active devices appears.
 
# Once the scanning process is complete, the system will display a list of active devices and assigned values such as IP Address, Device Type, Status, etc. Devices that appear on this list may be selected for editing. By default, the PBX will only display IPitomy and Aastra devices. Filter options can be modified to change display other devices.
 
 
''If you click the refresh-view more than once within a short time period, the network is not rescanning. The minimum time period allowed between scans is indicated under the Advanced Settings (Min Refresh Interval).The network is only scanned for new information when you click REFRESH. Both REFRESH and FILTER ONLY apply whatever filters you have chosen to the displayed list.''
 
 
==== List of Devices & Extensions ====
 
The list of discovered network devices comes from two sources:
 
 
* Network
 
* PBX Database
 
 
<center>'''Figure 40 – Auto-Discovery Device Color Legend'''</center>
 
 
 
The following table describes the status of devices that will appear once an Auto-Discovery scan is completed.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/ Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Assigned =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This field indicates that extension that is assigned to the device (phones). Clicking on the box to the left of this field allows you to select it for editing.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Device =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The Device column lists info about the device. Database info is preferred, so if a device is set to a certain phone type in the database, this is listed instead of the actual device type.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Status =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the status of the device. If the status field is blank, this indicates that the device was not found on the network.
 
 
'''''NOTE:''' Phones that are in the process of restarting, turned-off, or operating on a different network during a network scan will not be in an “'''Online'''” status.''
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Hovering the mouse over this icon will provide device information. See '''Figure 43''' for an example of the data that can be viewed.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== MAC Address =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the MAC Address assigned to the device.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== IP Address =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the IP Address assigned to the device.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 24 – Auto-Discovery Scan Details'''</center>
 
 
==== Device Information ====
 
To view detail information for a specific device, hover your cursor over the information icon to obtain details about the network device or phone. This can be an important source of information about which phones are available for live configuration.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 41 – Auto- Discovery Device Values'''</center>
 
 
 
==== Edit Selected Tab ====
 
The IP PBX system offers many ways to configure devices. This section describes an optional method using the Auto-Discovery feature.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 42 – Auto-Discovery Edit Selected Functions'''</center>
 
 
 
The following table describes the fields and functions available on the Edit Selected Tab of the Auto-Discovery page:
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Commands Phone?'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Create =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Create new extensions for selected phones. You can upload extension details in a file or manually enter information.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>NO</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Assign =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Assign existing extensions to selected phones.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>NO</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Unassign =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Removes the configuration file for the phone and all association between the extension and the phone.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>NO</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Unassign & Default =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Same as Unassign but also sends a Factory Default instruction to the phone.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>YES</center>
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 25 – Auto-Discovery Edit Selected Tab Functions and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
===== Create, Assign and Configure Phone =====
 
The following outlines steps to create, assign and configure a device.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:none;border-right:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT:''' '''This assumes that the phones are in a FACTORY DEFAULTED state.'''
 
 
'''IPitomy recommends using the CSV upload file and the IP550 phone type which will help to simplify the setup and auto configuration process.'''
 
 
|}
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Extensions''''''Destinations''''''Auto-Discovery '''page, click the '''Edit Selected '''tab.
 
# Place a check mark next to the phones you wish to use when creating the extensions
 
# Click the '''Create''' button.
 
# Enter the new extension information. The MAC addresses of the selected phones will be populated so you have a reference as to what phones you are creating the extensions for.
 
# Click the “'''Create'''” button. If successful, Click “'''Return to Extensions'''”
 
# Click the '''Apply Changes''' link located at the right hand corner of the top of the page, to commit the changes to the database.
 
# Click the “'''Auto-Discovery'''” button and you will note the newly created extensions are now assigned to the phones that were checked.
 
# Check the boxes next to the phones that you just created extensions for.
 
# Click the Commands Tab.
 
# Click on the '''Configure & Restart''' button to provision the phones.
 
 
==== View Settings Tab ====
 
Filtering does not change how the network scanning is performed. It only limits the list of items displayed. This means that if you only want to change filters it is not necessary to re-scan the network. All of the network information from the last network scan is retained and used by filters.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 43 – Auto-Discovery View Settings Page'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Commands Phone'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Select All, None, Invert =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Check or uncheck multiple checkboxes with the click of a button.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>NO</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Refresh =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Scan the network for devices. Scanning is done using the settings in Advanced Scan Settings. The scan results displayed depend on the active filters,controlled via Advanced Filter Settings.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>NO</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Filter Only =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Displays results of the last network scan after applying the filters set in Advanced Filter Settings.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>NO</center>
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 26 – Auto-Discovery Functions and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
===== Advanced Filter Settings =====
 
<center>'''Figure 44 – Auto-Discovery Advanced Filter Settings'''</center>
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Sort Order =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This allows you to set what order items are listed. Hover your cursor over the help icon next to the Sort Order fields for options.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Hide =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Allows you to hide different status types from view.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Filter Patterns =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Allows you to either enter a partial MAC or IP here. The only system criterion is that the pattern must match from the first character onward. i.e. “000D” would match “000DE” but not “A000DE”.
 
 
Full Regular Expression Matching is supported when you enclose your search pattern in double quotes. Some Examples are:
 
 
* Pattern 1.2.3 = ^1\.2\.3
 
* Pattern “1\.2\.3.*” = 1\.2\.3.*
 
 
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Filter by Type =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| You can select multiple device types to filter by. Auto-Discovery is aware of MAC address ranges used by many popular networked devices. Although this is not the only way Auto-Discovery identifies devices, this allows the tool to identify and filter devices by type.
 
 
''Only IPitomy devices and Aastra phones are shown by default because they are set in the Filter by Type.''
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 27 – Advanced Filter Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
===== Advanced Scan Settings =====
 
Changes to Scan Settings are kept when you click the GUI ‘Refresh’ button. Clicking on your browser’s refresh button will discard changes. For the most part these settings can remain unchanged and all will function as needed.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 45 – Auto-Discovery Advanced Scan Settings Page'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''Sections/Fields'''
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Min Refresh Interval =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Minimum number of seconds required between fresh network scans. If you attempt to scan the network more often than this you only get results stored from a previous scan.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Maximum wait =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Maximum number of seconds to wait for all packets to return.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Packet Count =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Number of packets to send
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== TX Interval =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Transmission interval between packets. Only meaningful when Packet Count is greater than 1. Minimum allowed value is 0.2
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Batch Size =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <nowiki>Divide scanning range into batch jobs. Jobs are run sequentially. Each job will have at most <Batch Size> pings running in parallel at a time. The special value 255 means run all pings as one big job.</nowiki>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Network =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Network address with last octet reserved for From and To range. Example: 192.168.1.x
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== From =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Start number for last octet of network address.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== To =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| End number for last octet of network address.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Send Wakeup ping before Survey Ping if… =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Some devices are slow to respond to the first ping they receive but have faster response times afterwards.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Port 80 Ping Wait =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Maximum seconds to wait for basic phone web interface to signal that it is alive. Rarely used.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Command Wait =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Maximum seconds to wait for most commands.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== User and Password =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Phone’s Web User Name & Password may have to be specified if the phone is not using factory default settings for these items. When these fields are blank Auto-Discovery uses default settings.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Factory Default Wait =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Maximum seconds to wait for the phone to signal completion of a Factory Default.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Reset =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The ‘Reset’ button will return all Scan Settings to original default values.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 28 – Auto-Discovery Advanced Scan Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
==== Commands Tab ====
 
The IP PBX system offers many ways to configure devices. This section describes an optional method using the use Auto-Discovery feature.
 
 
 
<center>'''Figure 46 – Auto-Discovery Command Functions Page'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Sections/ Fields'''</center>
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Commands Phone?'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Factory Default =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Sends a Factory Default and restarts the phone.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>YES</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Restart =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Sends a Restart instruction to the phone.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>YES</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Configure & Restart =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Instructs phone to set TFTP server to the Server IP specified under Advanced Settings. Then the phone is commanded to restart, which will result in pulling down configuration files and firmware files if there are updated ones present.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>YES</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Assign, Configure & Restart =====
 
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Combines the functions of the Assign button with the Configure & Restart button.
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>YES</center>
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 29 – Auto-Discovery Command Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
===== Factory Default Phone =====
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Extensions''''''Destinations '''page, click the '''Auto-Discovery Tab'''.
 
# Click the “'''Auto-Discovery'''” button, choosing to scan or not scan the network as needed.
 
# Click (placing a checkmark) on the boxes next to phones you wish to default.
 
# From the '''Auto-Discovery''' page, click on the '''Command''' tab. Click the “'''Factory Default'''” button. Wait long enough for the phones to default and restart. This could be anywhere from 30 seconds to 2 minutes for each phone, depending on the model. The phones will set themselves back to factory default and reboot during this period.
 
 
===== Troubleshooting Network Scanning Problems =====
 
Scan settings have been configured to work in a standard one subnet network environment. More complicated environments may require further tuning. The most useful setting is ‘Maximum wait’. However noisy environments will require increasing the packet Count and TX interval.
 
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
To tune scanning for your network:
 
 
# From the '''Extensions''''''Destination''''''Auto-Discovery''' page, click on '''Advanced Scan Settings''' link.
 
# Increase the ‘'''Maximum Wait'''’ setting by a few seconds.
 
# Click the GUI ‘'''Refresh'''’ button.
 
 
''More specific tuning will require knowledge of your network and diagnostic tools like Ping.Phones that are in the process of restarting, turned-off, or operating on a different network during a network scan will not be in an “'''Online'''” status.''
 
 
 
===== Auto Provisioning Phone Settings from Actual Device =====
 
The remainder of the configuration is done via the Phone interface, and will only work with IPitomy phones.
 
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# Create an extension, setting the Device to either IP550 or IP120, depending on what IPitomy phone you intend to register to the extension.
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #000000;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #000000;border-left:0.0069in solid #000000;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"|
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #000000;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| '''IMPORTANT: To configure the phone using the auto provisioning, make sure that the “Auto-Provisioning” parameter is RUNNING. This can be done in PBX SetupGeneral option of the system.'''
 
 
|}
 
# From your phone, select the Menu button to start Auto-Provisioning then select '''Option 7: SIP Settings '''(you can do this without using the scroll keys by just pressing Menu then 7).
 
# It will prompt you for the '''Admin''' password. Enter the default password “'''1234'''” then press the Enter softkey (IP550) or the OK button (IP120)
 
# Select '''Option 8: Auto Prov'''.
 
# Select “'''YES'''” when the '''''Autosearch PBX '''prompt'' appears.
 
# '''Enter''' either the '''extension''' number of the extension that has been created.
 
# Press the Done softkey (IP550) or the OK button (IP120) and the phone will run through the process of downloading its configuration file, updated firmware file, etc.
 
 
=== Edit Phone Settings ===
 
The settings for each individual device (phone) can be configured in the IP PBX system. The following outlines the steps to modify the phone settings from the IP PBX system.
 
 
==== View Phone Settings ====
 
<center>'''Figure 47 – Extension Listing'''</center>
 
 
 
==== Edit Phone Settings ====
 
===== Key Settings =====
 
<center>'''Figure 48 – Edit Phone Key Settings Page'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Sections/ Fields'''</center>
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Key Type =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Key type determines what function a key performs. A dropdown list shows which key types are available to the phone model you are working with.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Label =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| This is the label associated with this key. If configured for a key around the LCD screen, this is what will display.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Value =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| The value completes a key’s function. It may contain a number to dial special codes or allow you to select an extension from a dropdown list. Most key types do not require you to enter a value. For example, the Voicemail key does not require a value because the System Administrator determines it for the end user.
 
 
|}
 
<center>'''Table 30 – Edit Key Settings and Descriptions'''</center>
 
 
 
'''''STEPS:'''''
 
 
# From the '''Extensions''''''Destination '''page, find the extension you want to edit.
 
# Click on the icon to the right of the extensions name. The '''Edit Phone Settings''' page appears.
 
# Make the necessary changes to the settings for the phone the click the '''Save & Configure Phone''' button.
 
# The PBX will update the configuration file and reboot the phone so that it can download the updated information for the keys.
 
 
===== Audio Settings =====
 
<center>'''Figure 49 – Edit Phone Audio Settings Page'''</center>
 
 
 
 
{| style="border-spacing:0;"
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Sections/ Fields'''</center>
 
| style="background-color:#b8cce4;border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| <center>'''Description'''</center>
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Handset Input =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Adjusts handset microphone volume. Default is 5.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Handset Output =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Adjusts handset speaker volume. Default is 5.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Speakerphone Input =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Adjusts speakerphone microphone volume. Default is 5.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Speakerphone Output =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Adjusts speakerphone speaker volume. Default is 5.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Headset Input =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Adjusts headset microphone volume. Default is 5.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Headset Output =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Adjusts headset speaker volume. Default is 5.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Ringer Volume =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Adjusts ringer volume. Default is 3.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Headset Mode =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Toggles functionality of making and answering calls. Default is Normal.
 
 
Normal: Primary method for making and answering calls will be the Handset and Speaker, depending on if the hookswitch is pressed.
 
 
Headset: Primary method for making and answering calls will be the Headset. Press the Headset key to wait for calls without an open line. After that, pressing a Line key will open a line on the headset or answer an inbound call on the headset, as will pressing the Ans softkey for an inbound call. The hookswitch will not be functional.
 
 
|-
 
| style="border-top:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-bottom:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-left:0.0069in solid #0000ff;border-right:none;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| ===== Ringer Mode =====
 
 
| style="border:0.0069in solid #0000ff;padding-top:0in;padding-bottom:0in;padding-left:0.075in;padding-right:0.075in;"| Toggles between Headset and Speaker for inbound ringing. Default is Speaker.
 
 
Speaker: Inbound calls ring on the speaker.
 
 
Headset: Used in conjunction with Headset Mode, this will have inbound calls ring to the headset instead of the speaker.